Revelation 5:9 — Word Study
N1904καὶ ᾄδουσιν ᾠδὴν καινὴν λέγοντες· ἄξιος εἶ λαβεῖν τὸ βιβλίον καὶ ἀνοῖξαι τὰς σφραγῖδας αὐτοῦ, ὅτι ἐσφάγης καὶ ἠγόρασας τῷ θεῷ ἡμᾶς ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου ἐκ πάσης φυλῆς καὶ γλώσσης καὶ λαοῦ καὶ ἔθνους
BSAAndkai they are singingadō▸ a songōdē newkainos [fresh, recently composed] saying;legō▸ Worthyaxios [deserving, having merit] are Youeimi▸ to takelambanō▸ theho scrollbiblion [book, written document] andkai to openanoigō▸ theho sealssphragis [locks, protections] of it,autos becausehoti You were slainsphazō▸ [killed, sacrificed] andkai You purchasedagorazō▸ [bought, redeemed] <the>ho to Godtheos [the supreme Deity] of usegō byen theho bloodahima [life, atoning sacrifice] of Yousu out ofek everypas tribephulē [family, clan] andkai tongueglōssa [language, dialect] andkai peoplelaos [nation, group] andkai nationethnos [Gentiles, non-Jewish people]
| Greek | English | Parsing |
|---|---|---|
| καὶ | And | Conjunction |
| ᾄδουσιν | they are singing | Verb, present, active |
| ᾠδὴν | a song | Noun, accusative, singular |
| καινὴν | new | Adjective, accusative, singular |
| λέγοντες· | saying; | Verb, present, active |
| ἄξιος | Worthy | Adjective, nominative, singular |
| εἶ | are You | Verb, present, active |
| λαβεῖν | to take | Verb, second aorist, active |
| τὸ | the | Article, accusative, singular |
| βιβλίον | scroll | Noun, accusative, singular |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| ἀνοῖξαι | to open | Verb, aorist, active |
| τὰς | the | Article, accusative, plural |
| σφραγῖδας | seals | Noun, accusative, plural |
| αὐτοῦ, | of it, | Personal pronoun, genitive, singular |
| ὅτι | because | Conjunction |
| ἐσφάγης | You were slain | Verb, second aorist, passive |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| ἠγόρασας | You purchased | Verb, aorist, active |
| τῷ | <the> | Article, dative, singular |
| θεῷ | to God | Noun, dative, singular |
| ἡμᾶς | of us | Personal pronoun, first person, accusative |
| ἐν | by | Preposition |
| τῷ | the | Article, dative, singular |
| αἵματί | blood | Noun, dative, singular |
| σου | of You | Personal pronoun, second person, genitive |
| ἐκ | out of | Preposition |
| πάσης | every | Adjective, genitive, singular |
| φυλῆς | tribe | Noun, genitive, singular |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| γλώσσης | tongue | Noun, genitive, singular |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| λαοῦ | people | Noun, genitive, singular |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| ἔθνους | nation | Noun, genitive, singular |
Every word in the verse. Click a row to open it in the panel on the left.
| BSB | And they sang a new song: “Worthy are You to take the scroll and open its seals, because You were slain, and by Your blood You purchased for God those from every tribe and tongue and people and nation. |
| KJV | And they sung a new song, saying, Thou art worthy to take the book, and to open the seals thereof: for thou wast slain, and hast redeemed us to God by thy blood out of every kindred, and tongue, and people, and nation; |
| ASV | And they sing a new song, saying, Worthy art thou to take the book, and to open the seals thereof: for thou wast slain, and didst purchase unto God with thy blood men of every tribe, and tongue, and people, and nation, |
| YLT | and they sing a new song, saying, 'Worthy art thou to take the scroll, and to open the seals of it, because thou wast slain, and didst redeem us to God in thy blood, out of every tribe, and tongue, and people, and nation, |
| WEB | They sang a new song, saying, “You are worthy to take the book and to open its seals, for you were killed, and bought us for God with your blood out of every tribe, language, people, and nation, |
| BBE | And their voices are sounding in a new song, saying, It is right for you to take the book and to make it open: for you were put to death and have made an offering to God of your blood for men of every tribe, and language, and people, and nation, |
Where they part company is ἀγοράζω — see How Translations Differ.
The verse consists of one main clause with several subordinate clauses that provide reasons for the praise being offered.
8 commentators on this verse
Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them ›
clause
subjectλέγω
verbᾄδω
The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.
Bars are logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.
Deep Study — Revelation 5:9
Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.
Context — The Song of the Redeemedgenerated
Revelation 5:9 describes a moment of worship in heaven where the redeemed sing a new song to the Lamb, acknowledging His worthiness to take the scroll and open its seals. This song highlights the significance of Christ's death and the universal scope of His redemption, as it encompasses people from every tribe, language, and nation. The context emphasizes the culmination of God's redemptive plan through Christ's sacrifice, linking it to the prophetic visions of the Old Testament.
Cross References
| Reference | Text (BSB) | |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Revelation 7:10–12 | And they cried out in a loud voice: “Salvation to our God, who sits on the throne, and to the Lamb!” |
| 2 | Revelation 14:3 | And they sang a new song before the throne and before the four living creatures and the elders. And no one could learn the song except the 144,000 who had been redeemed from the earth. |
| 3 | Psalm 33:3 | Sing to Him a new song; play skillfully with a shout of joy. |
| 4 | Psalm 40:3 | He put a new song in my mouth, a hymn of praise to our God. Many will see and fear and put their trust in the LORD. |
| 5 | Psalm 96:1 | Sing to the LORD a new song; sing to the LORD, all the earth. |
The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 35 references, hung on the phrase they belong to
The Key Word — ἀγοράζω, agorazōgenerated
The verb ἀγοράζω (agorazō) means 'to buy' or 'to purchase,' often in the context of redeeming or acquiring something at a price. In this verse, it signifies the act of Christ purchasing believers for God through His sacrifice, indicating a transfer of ownership and a deep spiritual significance.
This word appears in various contexts in the New Testament, often relating to the concept of redemption. The aorist tense indicates a completed action, emphasizing that the purchase has been fully accomplished through Christ's blood.
How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated
The verse is rendered in the Berean Standard Bible as 'You purchased for God those from every tribe and tongue and people and nation.' This is echoed in the King James Version with 'hast redeemed us to God by thy blood out of every kindred, and tongue, and people, and nation,' highlighting the act of redemption.
Where translations differ, they do so in the rendering of ἀγοράζω. The BSB and others use 'purchased,' while the KJV opts for 'redeemed.' This reflects a subtle difference in emphasis: 'purchased' focuses on the transaction, while 'redeemed' emphasizes the liberation aspect.
Sentence Structuregenerated
The main verb of the verse is ᾄδουσιν, they are singing, which governs the entire clause. The structure includes a noun phrase as the object of the singing, followed by a series of clauses that explain the worthiness of the Lamb and the reasons for their praise.
The verse is composed of a main clause stating the act of singing, followed by a participial phrase that describes what they are saying, and further clauses that provide the reasons for the Lamb's worthiness, including His sacrificial death and the resultant redemption.
Septuagint Backgroundgenerated
ἀγοράζω does not have a direct equivalent in the Septuagint, but it relates to concepts of buying and redeeming found in various contexts. The Old Testament often speaks of God redeeming His people, which resonates with the theme of this verse.
The concept of a 'new song' is also present in the Psalms, where the faithful sing of God's deliverance, paralleling the worship seen in this passage.
In plain words — the whole versegenerated
Revelation 5:9 describes how the heavenly beings sing a new song to the Lamb, declaring Him worthy because He was slain and has redeemed people from every tribe, language, and nation by His blood.
Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated
A new song signifies a fresh expression of worship and gratitude for the redemption accomplished by Christ, highlighting the transformative nature of His sacrifice.
The Lamb is worthy because He was slain and through His blood, He redeemed people for God, fulfilling God's plan of salvation.
This phrase emphasizes the universal scope of Christ's redemption, indicating that His sacrifice is for all people, regardless of their background or ethnicity.
This verse encapsulates the central theme of redemption throughout the Bible, showing that Christ's sacrifice is the fulfillment of God's promise to save His people from all nations.
Reflection Questionsgenerated
- How does understanding Christ's worthiness impact my view of worship?
- In what ways can I express gratitude for the redemption I have received?
- What does it mean for me to be part of a people redeemed from every tribe and nation?
- How can I share the message of Christ's sacrifice with those from different backgrounds?
The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it
Several early church Fathers comment on this verse, reflecting on the significance of the new song and the nature of Christ's redemption.
If I remember not that it is I who have served Him, how shall I ascribe glory to God? How sing to Him "the new song," if I am ignorant that it is I who owe Him thanks? But why is exception taken only against the change of the flesh,Early Church Fathers on Revelation 5 →
Christ wrote a new song by the harmonious truth of both Testaments. This he did when he, remaining the Word which was in the beginning, was born by a new sort of birth through the Virgin.Early Church Fathers on Revelation 5 →
Through this passage it is revealed that the elders, both those in the Old Testament and those in the New Testament, were well-pleasing to God,Early Church Fathers on Revelation 5 →
Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse
Each of these wrote on Revelation 5:9 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.
John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire BibleAnd they sung a new song,.... Upon a new occasion and subject, redemption by the blood of the Lamb, and his worthiness to open the sealed book; and in distinction from the old song of Moses and the
Read John Gill on Revelation 5 →Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's CommentaryAnd they sung a new song, saying, Thou art worthy to take the book, and to open the seals thereof: for thou wast slain, and hast redeemed us to God by thy blood out of every kindred, and tongue, and
Read Robert Jamieson on Revelation 5 →Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy BibleAnd they sung a new song: by a new song is either to be understood an excellent song, (for new songs are usually most valued), or (which pleaseth me best) new as to the matter of it; for the servants of God under the Old Testament could not bless God for the actual redemption of man by the blood of Christ, but only rejoice in hope, embracing the promises seen afar off by the eye of faith. Saying, Thou art worthy to take the book, and to open the seals thereof; they acknowledge Christ worthy to be intrusted with his church, and the revelations of the counsels of God, with relation to it, to open them. For thou wast slain, and hast redeemed us, &c.; because he had redeemed his church…
Read Matthew Poole on Revelation 5 →John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments9 And they sung a new song, saying, Thou art worthy to take the book, and to open the seals thereof: for thou wast slain, and hast redeemed us to God by thy blood out of every kindred, and tongue, and people, and nation; Ver. 9. And they sung] A general joy in heaven and earth. Surely, it is a pleasant thing to see the light; how much more to see the light of the knowledge of God in the face of Jesus Christ! 2 Corinthians 4:6. What a deal of triumph and exaltation is here all the Church over upon the opening of this book upon the receipt of this revelation! Should not this excite and kindle in our hearts a more earnest desire of understanding these mysteries? "Oh, I could find in my heart…
Read John Trapp on Revelation 5 →Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers(9, 10) And they sung a new song, saying . . .—Better, And they sing a new song, saying. The use of the present (“sing”) is another example of that intensity of interest of which the change of tense in the last verse afforded an instance. As he records his vision, he sees it anew; he describes the action as though it were even now taking place, and he still hears the notes of praise. He who knows what it is to have the strains of some rich melody haunt him for days will understand how the prophet would hear the glad chorus burst forth afresh in his ears when he recalled the vision. The new song; the chorus of the redeemed— “Worthy art Thou to take the roll, And to open the seals thereof…
Read Charles John Ellicott on Revelation 5 →AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the BibleVerse 9. A new song] Composed on the matters and blessings of the Gospel, which was just now opened on earth. But new song may signify a most excellent song; and by this the Gospel and its blessings are probably signified. The Gospel is called a new song, Psalms 96:1. And perhaps there is an allusion in the harps here to Psalms 144:9: I will sing a NEW SONG unto thee, O God: upon a PSALTERY, and an INSTRUMENT of TEN STRINGS, c. The same form of speech is found, Isaiah 42:10: Sing unto the Lord a NEW SONG, c. and there the prophet seems to have the Gospel dispensation particularly in view. Thou-hast redeemed us to God - out of every - nation] It appears, therefore, that the living creatures…
Read AdamClarke on Revelation 5 →CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and CollegesThe New Song, Revelation 5:9-139. And they sung] Should be they sing. It may be only an historic present, but perhaps, though to the Seer the song of adoration appeared to begin now, and to stop in time to let other voices be heard, he means to intimate that in fact their adoration is continued to eternity. See on Revelation 4:9-10.and hast redeemed] The word rendered “redeemed” means simply “bought,” as it is rendered in 1 Corinthians 6:20, &c.: it does not express that the effect of the purchase was to restore those bought either to their rightful owner, or to liberty, though of course both are true, but all that this text expresses, is, that Christ has bought us, and that we now belong…
Read Cambridge on Revelation 5 →Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the BibleAnd they sung a new song - Compare Revelation 14:3. New in the sense that it is a song consequent on redemption, and distinguished therefore from the songs sung in heaven before the work of redemption was consummated.
Read Albert Barnes on Revelation 5 →The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company
Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.
Modern formal
And they sang a new song: “Worthy are You to take the scroll and open its seals, because You were slain, and by Your blood You purchased for God those from every tribe and tongue and people and nation.
They sang a new song, saying, “You are worthy to take the book and to open its seals, for you were killed, and bought us for God with your blood out of every tribe, language, people, and nation,
And they sang a new song: “Worthy are You to take the scroll and open its seals, because You were slain, and by Your blood You purchased us for God from every tribe and tongue and people and nation.
They were singing a new song: “You are worthy to take the scroll and to open its seals because you were killed, and at the cost of your own blood you have purchased for God persons from every tribe, language, people, and nation.
Tyndale line
And they sung a new song, saying, Thou art worthy to take the book, and to open the seals thereof: for thou wast slain, and hast redeemed us to God by thy blood out of every kindred, and tongue, and people, and nation;
And they sing a new song, saying, Worthy art thou to take the book, and to open the seals thereof: for thou wast slain, and didst purchase unto God with thy blood men of every tribe, and tongue, and people, and nation,
And they sing a new song, saying, Worthy art thou to take the book, and to open the seals thereof: for thou wast slain, and didst purchase unto God with thy blood men of every tribe, and tongue, and people, and nation,
And they sung a new song, saying, Thou art worthy to take the book, and to open the seals of it: for thou wast slain, and hast redeemed us to God by thy blood out of every kindred, and language, and people, and nation;
And they sung a new song, saying, Thou art worthie to take the Booke, and to open the seales thereof, because thou wast killed, and hast redeemed vs to God by thy blood out of euery kinred, and tongue, and people, and nation,
Strictly literal
And they sing a new song, saying, Thou art worthy to take the book, and to open its seals; because thou hast been slain, and hast redeemed to God, by thy blood, out of every tribe, and tongue, and people, and nation,
and they sing a new song, saying, 'Worthy art thou to take the scroll, and to open the seals of it, because thou wast slain, and didst redeem us to God in thy blood, out of every tribe, and tongue, and people, and nation,
and they sing a new song, saying, “Worthy are You to take the scroll, and to open its seals, because You were slain, and You purchased us to God in Your blood, out of every tribe, and tongue, and people, and nation,
They sang a new song: “You are worthy to take the scroll and to open its seals. For you were slaughtered, and with your blood you purchased people for God from every tribe, language, people, and nation.
From the Latin
And they sung a new canticle, saying: Thou art worthy, O Lord, to take the book, and to open the seals thereof; because thou wast slain, and hast redeemed us to God, in thy blood, out of every tribe, and tongue, and people, and nation.
Simplified
They sang a new song, “You are worthy to take the scroll and open its seals, for you were slain and with your blood you redeemed for God people from every tribe, language, people, and nation.
And their voices are sounding in a new song, saying, It is right for you to take the book and to make it open: for you were put to death and have made an offering to God of your blood for men of every tribe, and language, and people, and nation,
Word by word, the decisions they made
Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.
The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank
This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.
Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.
The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac
Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.
et cantabant canticum novum, dicentes : Dignus es, Domine, accipere librum, et aperire signacula ejus : quoniam occisus es, et redemisti nos Deo in sanguine tuo ex omni tribu, et lingua, et populo, et natione :
Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.
ܕܡܫܒܚܝܢ ܬܫܒܘܚܬܐ ܚܕܬܐ ܘܐܡܪܝܢ ܫܘܝܬ ܗܘ ܠܡܣܒܝܘܗܝ ܠܟܬܒܐ ܘܠܡܫܪܐ ܛܒܥܘܗܝ ܥܠ ܕܐܬܢܟܣܬ ܘܙܒܢܬܢ ܒܕܡܟ ܠܐܠܗܐ ܡܢ ܟܠ ܫܪܒܬܐ ܘܥܡܡܐ ܘܐܡܘܬܐ
The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.
Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.
The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say
Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.
καὶ ᾄδουσιν ᾠδὴν καινὴν λέγοντες· ἄξιος εἶ λαβεῖν τὸ βιβλίον καὶ ἀνοῖξαι τὰς σφραγῖδας αὐτοῦ, ὅτι ἐσφάγης καὶ ἠγόρασας τῷ θεῷ — ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου ἐκ πάσης φυλῆς καὶ γλώσσης καὶ λαοῦ καὶ ἔθνους
The standard critical text of the New Testament.
καὶ ᾄδουσιν ᾠδὴν καινὴν λέγοντες· ἄξιος εἶ λαβεῖν τὸ βιβλίον καὶ ἀνοῖξαι τὰς σφραγῖδας αὐτοῦ, ὅτι ἐσφάγης καὶ ἠγόρασας τῷ θεῷ — ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου ἐκ πάσης φυλῆς καὶ γλώσσης καὶ λαοῦ καὶ ἔθνους
The previous edition, still widely cited.
καὶ ᾄδουσιν ᾠδὴν καινὴν λέγοντες· ἄξιος εἶ λαβεῖν τὸ βιβλίον καὶ ἀνοῖξαι τὰς σφραγῖδας αὐτοῦ, ὅτι ἐσφάγης καὶ ἠγόρασας τῷ θεῷ — ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου ἐκ πάσης φυλῆς καὶ γλώσσης καὶ λαοῦ καὶ ἔθνους
The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.
καὶ ᾄδουσιν ᾠδὴν καινὴν λέγοντες· ἄξιος εἶ λαβεῖν τὸ βιβλίον καὶ ἀνοῖξαι τὰς σφραγῖδας αὐτοῦ, ὅτι ἐσφάγης καὶ ἠγόρασας τῷ θεῷ — ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου ἐκ πάσης φυλῆς καὶ γλώσσης καὶ λαοῦ καὶ ἔθνους
The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.
καὶ ᾄδουσιν ᾠδὴν καινὴν λέγοντες· ἄξιος εἶ λαβεῖν τὸ βιβλίον καὶ ἀνοῖξαι τὰς σφραγῖδας αὐτοῦ, ὅτι ἐσφάγης καὶ ἠγόρασας τῷ θεῷ ἡμᾶς ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου ἐκ πάσης φυλῆς καὶ γλώσσης καὶ λαοῦ καὶ ἔθνους
An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.
καὶ ᾄδουσιν ᾠδὴν καινὴν λέγοντες· ἄξιος εἶ λαβεῖν τὸ βιβλίον καὶ ἀνοῖξαι τὰς σφραγῖδας αὐτοῦ, ὅτι ἐσφάγης καὶ ἠγόρασας τῷ θεῷ ἡμᾶς ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου ἐκ πάσης φυλῆς καὶ γλώσσης καὶ λαοῦ καὶ ἔθνους
A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.
καὶ ᾄδουσιν ᾠδὴν καινὴν λέγοντες· ἄξιος εἶ λαβεῖν τὸ βιβλίον καὶ ἀνοῖξαι τὰς σφραγῖδας αὐτοῦ, ὅτι ἐσφάγης καὶ ἠγόρασας τῷ θεῷ ἡμᾶς ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου ἐκ πάσης φυλῆς καὶ γλώσσης καὶ λαοῦ καὶ ἔθνους
The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.
καὶ ᾄδουσιν ᾠδὴν καινὴν λέγοντες· ἄξιος εἶ λαβεῖν τὸ βιβλίον καὶ ἀνοῖξαι τὰς σφραγῖδας αὐτοῦ, ὅτι ἐσφάγης καὶ ἠγόρασας τῷ θεῷ ἡμᾶς ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου ἐκ πάσης φυλῆς καὶ γλώσσης καὶ λαοῦ καὶ ἔθνους
The printed tradition behind the King James Version.
A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.
Word by word, across the editions
| Word | Editions carrying it | Missing from |
|---|---|---|
| ἡμᾶς of us | Tyn, Treg, TR, Byz | NA28, NA27, SBL, WH |
The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with
This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.
Lexicons — every word in Revelation 5:9
One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.
Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The Greek word ᾄδω (adō) means 'to sing' and is primarily used in the context of praising God. It appears in both intransitive and transitive forms, with the New Testament referencing it in passages like Ephesians 5:19 and Colossians 3:16, where it conveys a sense of lyrical devotion. The word has roots in various dialects and has been used throughout Greek literature, indicating a rich tradition of vocal expression.
ἄδω (ἀείδω); common in Grk. of every period; in Sept. for 73w ; to sing, chant; 1. intrans.: τινί, to the praise of any one (Judith xvi. 1 (2)), Eph. v. 19; Col. iii. 16, (in both passages of the lyrical emotion of a devout and grateful soul). 2. trans.: ὠδήν, Rev. v. ἀρ σιν 8.» πνν θὲ
ᾄδω (adō) — to sing.
ἀείδω,
Ionic dialect and poetry form used by [Refs 8th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. and Comedy texts (even in trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+], also in Ionic dialect Prose; contraction ᾄδω (also [Refs 6th c.BC+]: imperfect ἤειδον[Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect ἄειδον[Refs 8th c.BC+]; Trag. and Attic dialect ᾖδον[Refs 5th c.BC+]: future ἀείσομαι[Refs 8th c.BC+]; rarely in active form ἀείσω, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and late Poets, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; still more rarely ᾄσω, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; Doric dialect ᾀσεῦμαι[Refs 3rd c.BC+]: aorist ἤεισα[Refs 8th c.BC+] —middle, aorist ἀεισάμην (in active sense) [Refs]:—passive, ἀείδομαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]: poetry imperfect ἀείδετο[Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist ᾔσθην, see below 11.1: perfect ᾖσμαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]: but ᾱ for the sake of meter [Refs 8th c.BC+]:— sing, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: hence of all kinds of vocal sounds, crow as cocks, [Refs…
Read the full entry →ᾄδω
v.
I sing
Verb-PAI-3P — Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · pluralpresent active indicative — an action in progress.
V-PAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural
→ See MUSIC
5 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 30 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἀλλὰ γὰρ οὐδεὶς οὔτε τῶν σφόδρα ὠμοθύμων οὔτε τῶν πάνυ δολερῶν καὶ ὑπούλων ἴσχυσε τὸν λεχθέντα τῶν Ἐσσαίων ἢ ὁσίων ὅμιλον αἰτιάσασθαι, πάντες δὲ ἀσθενέστεροι τῆς τῶν ἀνδρῶν καλοκἀγαθίας γενόμενοι καθάπερ αὐτονόμοις καὶ ἐλευθέροις οὖσιν ἐκ φύσεως…
τοῦτον γὰρ εἶναι τὸν Δαυίδην, ὃν ᾄδουσιν αἱ παρθένοι πολλὰς μυριάδας Παλαιστίνων ἀπολέσαντα.
καταξιωθεὶς γὰρ ὀνόματος θεοπρεπεστάτου, ἐν οἷς περιφέρω δεσμοῖς ᾅδω τὰς ἐκκλησίας, ἐν αἷς ἕνωσιν: εὔχομαι σαρκὸς καὶ πνεύματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τοῦ διὰ παντὸς ἡμῶν ζῆν, πίστεώς τε καὶ ἀγάπης, ἡς οὐδὲν προκέκριται, τὸ δὲ κυριώτερον Ἰησοῦ καὶ πατρός:…
β … φν χόρτου δέσμαι πα Η χοῖροι νγ … … … ἐπὶ δὲ αδω … εν … … χόρτου δέσμαι … χοῖροι με ἐλαίου ῥαφανίνου κοτύλαι β φακ
ν μηδενὸς … ος τὸ σύνολον … … ῦ βίου χρήσασθαι … αδω … η τὰ αὐτῷ π … … της ειτ … … … συνολων δικαίοις
ν Φλαυίῳ Γενναδίῳ … τυ … μ … α … … … ασμημης … αδω … … ἀπὸ τῆς Ἑρμουπολιτῶν … vestiges καὶ πεπληρῶσαι παρ’ ὑμῶν τῆς τελείας καὶ
The Greek word ᾠδή (i.e., *ōdē*) means 'song' or 'ode' and is derived from a contraction of ἀοιδή (i.e., *aoidē*). It encompasses both joyful and sad songs, often used in the context of praise to God or Christ in the New Testament. The term appears in various forms of poetry and is associated with spiritual songs in passages like Ephesians 5:19 and Colossians 3:16.
Aut these words occur together at Ephes. v. 19, and again δ΄. Col. iii. 16; both times in the same order, and in passages which very nearly repeat one another ; cf. Ps. Ixvi. 1. When some expositors refuse even to attempt to distinguish between them, urging that St. Paul had certainly no intention of classifying the different forms of Christian poetry, this statement, no doubt, is quite true; but neither, on the other hand, would he have used, where there is evidently no temptation to rhetorical amplification, three words, if one would have equally served his turn. It may fairly be questioned whether we can trace very accurately the lines of demarcation between the ‘“ psalms and hymns and spiritual songs’ of which the Apostle makes mention, or whether he traced these lines for himself with a perfect accuracy. Still each must have had a meaning which belonged to it more, and by a better…
Read the full entry →ᾠδή (ōdē) — song.
ᾠδή, ἡ,
contraction for ἀοιδή, song, lay, ode, [Refs], of dirges, πολλὰς θρήνων ᾠδάς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but also of joyful songs, songs of praise, καλλίνικος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κιθαρίζειν πρὸς τὴν ᾠ. [Refs]; ᾠδαὶ καὶ ἡ ἄλλη ποίησις lyric poetry and.., [Refs], compare 398c; opposed to λέξις, [Refs]; ἐν ᾠδαῖς καὶ μύθοις καὶ λόγοις [Refs]; of poems such as those of Stesichorus on Helen, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the various songs associated with particular employments or conditions, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
2. ={ἐπῳδός}, magic song, spell, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]
3. metonymy for χορδή, Τέρπανδρος.. δέκα ζεῦξε Μοῦσαν ἐν ᾠδαῖς [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. singing, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; of birds, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
ᾠδή
ode
from 103; a chant or "ode" (the general term for any words sung; while
5215 denotes especially a religious metrical composition, and 5568
still more specially, a Hebrew cantillation):--song.
see GREEK for 103
see GREEK for 5215
see GREEK for 5568
ᾠδή, ῆς, ἡ
n.f.
an ode, song
ᾠδή ᾠδή, ἡ, contr. for ἀοιδή as ᾁδω for ἀείδω a song, lay, ode, Hhymn., Soph., Eur.; pl. lyric poetry, Plat.
song, singing, Plut.
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
(shir, shirah): Besides the great collection of sacred songs contained in the Psalter, as well as the lyric outbursts, marked by strong religious feeling, on great national occasions, it is natural to believe, and we have evidence to show, that the Hebrews possessed a large number of popular songs of a secular kind. So of Songs (which see) of itself proves this. Probably the very oldest song or fragment of song in the Old Testament is that "To the well" (Nu 21:17). W. R. Smith (Religions of the Semites, 167) regards this invocation of the waters to rise as in its origin hardly a mere poetic figure. He compares what Cazwini 1, 189, records of the well of Ilabistan: "When the water failed, a feast was held at its source with music and dancing, to induce it to flow again." If, however, the song had its origin in an early form of…
7 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 7 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 50 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
εἰσὶ γὰρ ὥσπερ ἀγαθῶν οὕτω καὶ κακῶν παρὰ τῷ θεῷ θησαυροί, ὡς ἐν μεγάλῃ φησὶν ᾠδῇ·
καὶ οἱ μὲν αὐτοί τε τὸν κίνδυνον οὕτως ἐκφυγόντες καὶ προσέτι τοὺς ἐχθροὺς ἐπιδόντες κεκολασμένους, ὡς οὐκ ἄλλοι τινὲς μνημονεύονται τῶν πρόσθεν ἀνθρώπων, ἐν ὕμνοις ἦσαν καὶ παιδιαῖς ὅλην τὴν νύκτα, καὶ Μωυσῆς ᾠδὴν εἰς τὸν θεὸν ἐγκώμιόν τε καὶ τῆς…
Κάστωρι ὑπὲρ τιμῆς γῆς … δραχμαὶ λη … … … ώδῃ ὑπὲρ τιμῆς γῆς … … … τιμῆς γῆς σ … … τετραπ δραχμαὶ τμ
δ ὁ στρατηγὸς πρὸς τῷ λογιστηρίῳ τη … … ἀνέγνων. ε ὁ στρατηγὸς … ωδη … … … εστώτων … … … θεν. ἀνέγνων. Αὐρήλιος … … τὰς ὑπηρέτης
καινός (kainos) means new or fresh, often in terms of quality rather than age. It contrasts with παλαιός (palaios), which means old or antiquated. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like new wine (Mt 9:17) and the new covenant (Lk 22:20). The lexicons note a distinction between καινός and νέος (neos), with the former emphasizing freshness and the latter focusing on recentness.
Some have denied that any difference can in the N. T. be traced between these words. They derive a certain plausible support for this denial from the fact that manifestly νέος and καινός, both rendered ‘new’ in our Version, are often interchangeably used; thus νέος ἄνθρωπος (Col. iii. 10), and καινὸς ἄνθρωπος (Eph. ii. 15), in both cases “ the 1 Our English ‘ world,’ etymologically regarded, more nearly represents αἰών than κόσμος. The old ‘ weralt’ (in modern German ‘ welt’) is composed of two words, ‘wer,’ man, and ‘alt,’ age or generation. The ground-meaning, therefore, of ‘weralt’ is generation of men (Pott. Etym. Forsch. vol. ii, pt. i. p. 125). Out of this expression of time unfolds itself that of space, as αἰών passed into the meaning of κόσμος (Grimm, Deutsche Myth. p. 752); but in the earliest German records ‘ weralt’ is used, first as an expression of time, and only…
Read the full entry →καινός, -ή, -όν,
[in LXX (Ez 11:19, al.) for חָדָשׁ, exc. Is 65:15 (אַחֵר);]
of that which is unused or unaccustomed, new in respect to form or quality, fresh, unused, novel: opp. to παλαιός, ἀρχαῖος, Mt 9:17 13:52, Mk 2:21, 22, Lk 5:36, 38, II Co 5:17, Eph 4:24; πλήρωμα, Mk 2:21; μνημεῖον, Mt 27:60, Jo 19:41; διαθήκη (T, WH, R, txt., omit), Read the full entry →
καινός, -7, -ov; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; Sept. for wan; new, i. e. a. as respects form; recenily made, fresh, recent, unused, unworn (opp. to παλαιός old, antiquated) : as ἀσκός, Mt. ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22 (Tom. Tr WH br. the cl.]; Lk. v. 88 ; ἱμάτιον, Lk. v. 36; πλήρωμα, Mk. ii. 21; μνημεῖον, Mt. xxvii. 60; with ἐν ᾧ οὐδέπω οὐδεὶς ἐτέθη added, Jn. xix. 413; καινὰ x. παλαιά, Mt. xiii. 52; new, which as recently made is superior to what it succeeds: διαθήκη, Mt. xxvi. 28 (Τ᾿ WH om. caw.) ; Mk. xiv. 24 RL; Lk. xxii. 20 (WH reject the pass.) ; 1 Co. xi. 25; 2Co. iii. 6; Heb. viii. 8,13; ix. 15, (Jer. xxxviil. (xxxi.) 31); καινοὶ οὐρανοί, καινὴ γῆ, 2 Pet. iii. 13; Rev. xxi. 1, (Is. xv. 17 ; xvi. 22) ; Ἱερουσαλήμ (see Ἱεροσόλυμα, fin.), Rey. iii. 12; xxi. 2; ἄνθρωπος (see the word, 1 f.), Eph. ii. 15; iv. 24, (καρδία, πνεῦμα, Ezek. xviii. 31; xxxvi. 26) ; καινὰ πάντα ποιῶ. I bring all…
Read the full entry →καινός (kainos) — new.
καινός, ή, όν,
new, fresh, ἔργα οὔτ᾽ ὦν κ. οὔτε παλαιά [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. λόγους φέρειν to bring news, [Refs]; τίδ᾽ ἐστὶ κ.; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἢ βούλεσθε περιιόντες πυνθάνεσθαι, “λέγεταί τι κ.;” [Refs 4th c.BC+] anew, afresh, [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc. (also ἐκ καινοῦ [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; especially of new dramas, τραγῳδῶν γιγνομένων καινῶν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; briefly τραγῳδοῖς κ. at the representation of the new tragedies, Docum. cited in [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but κ. κωμῳδία, τραγῳδία, of a new style of drama, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
2. newly-made, κύλικες, τριήρης, ὀθόνια, οἶνος, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
3. adverb -νῶς newly, afresh, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
καινός
kainos
of uncertain affinity; new (especially in freshness; while 3501 is
properly so with respect to age:--new.
see GREEK for 3501
καινός, ή, όν
Adj
fresh, new
καινός καινός, new, fresh, Lat. recens, novus, καινὰ καὶ παλαιὰ ἔργα Hdt.; καινοὺς λόγους φέρειν to bring news, Aesch.; λέγεταί τι καινόν; Dem.; ἐκ καινῆς (sc. ἀρχῆς) anew, afresh, Lat. de novo, Thuc.:—esp. of dramas produced for the first time, Aeschin., Dem.
newly-invented, new-fangled, novel, Eur., etc.; κ. θεοί strange gods, Plat.; καινά innovations, Xen.; οὐδὲν καινότερον εἰσέφερε τῶν ἄλλων he introduced as little of anything new as others, id. Xen.; τὸ καινὸν τοῦ πολέμου the unforeseen turn which war often takes, Thuc.
κ. ἄνθρωπος = novus homo, Plut.
Adj-ASF — Adjective · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
A-ASF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
44 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 42 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 28 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„τίς ὁ ἄνθρωπος ὁ οἰκοδομήσας οἰκίαν καινὴν καὶ οὐκ ἐνεκαίνισεν αὐτήν;
Λαμέχου γάρ ἐστιν υἱός, οὗ πατὴρ ἦν Μαθουσάλας, οὗτος δὲ ἦν τοῦ Ἀνώχου τοῦ Ἰαρέδου, Μαλαήλου δὲ Ἰάρεδος ἐγεγόνει, ὃς ἐκ Καϊνᾶ τεκνοῦται τοῦ Ἀνώσου σὺν ἀδελφαῖς πλείοσιν, Ἄνωσος δὲ Σήθου υἱὸς ἦν τοῦ Ἀδάμου·
ταῦτα οὖν κατήργησεν, ἵνα ὁ καινὸς νόμος τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἄνευ ζυγοῦ ἀνάγκης ὤν, μὴ ἀνθρωποποίητον ἔχῃ τὴν προσφοράν.
Σαβῖνος Γεμείνωι τῶι ἰδίωι χαίρειν. εὖ ποιήσεις δοὺς Οὐηστείνωι εἰς τὸν ζυγὸν αὐτοῦ ζυγόδεσμον καινὸν στερεόν, ὃ καὶ ἀλείψεις ἐπιμελῶς, ἐκ τῶν ἐν τῆι κιβωτῶι τῶν ἀσκῶν ἧι ἔχεις
τετελώνηται διὰ πύλης Καινῆς ἐρημοφυλακίας Χήρης ἐξάγων ὄνον ἕνα . ἔτους κθ Ἐπεὶφ κα.
μόνας, γίνονται κριθῆς ἀρτάβαι τμ, ἐξ ὧν ὑπελογήθησαν ὑπὲρ ἑκατοστῆς α 𐅵 διαφόρου μέτρου καινοῦ παρὰ τὸ παλαιὸν κριθῆς ἀρτάβαι πέντε , λοιπὰς καθαρᾶς ἀδόλου ἀβώλου κεκοσκινευμένης κριθῆς ἀρτάβας
λέγω (legō) is a primary Greek verb meaning 'to say' or 'to speak.' It encompasses a range of uses, including expressing thoughts, making declarations, and narrating events. The New Testament frequently employs it in direct speech and as a way to convey meaning, such as in Matthew 27:11. Abbott-Smith notes its distinction from similar verbs like λαλέω.
In dealing with synonyms of the N. T. we plainly need not concern ourselves with such earlier, or even contemporary, uses of the words which we are discriminating, as lie altogether outside of the N. T. sphere, when these uses do not illustrate, and have not affected, their Scriptural employment. It follows from this that all those contemptuous uses of λαλεῖν as to talk at random, as one ἀθυρόστομος, or with no door to his lips, might do; of λαλιά, as chatter («Kpacia λόγου ἄλογος, Plato, Defin. 416)—for I cannot believe that we are to find this at John iv. 42—may be dismissed and set aside. The antithesis in the line of Eupolis (Meineke, /ragm. Com. Gr. p. 174), Λαλεῖν ἄριστος, ἀδυνατώτατος λέγειν, does little or nothing to illustrate the matter in hand. The distinction which indeed exists between the words may in this way be made clear. There are two leading aspects under which speech…
Read the full entry →λέγω,
[in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Ge 22:16, al.;]
in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount.
In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Ac 13:15 24:10; seq. orat. dir., Mt 9:34, Mk 3:11, Jo 1:29, al.; seq. ὅτι recit., Mk 3:21, Lk 1:24, Jo 6:14, al.; acc. et. inf., Lk 11:18, Jo 12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mt 11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman…
λέγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἔλεγαν, Jn. xi. 56 Tdf. [ef. ἔχω, init.]): I. in its earliest use in Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; οἵ. J. G. Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius § 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect, gather; to pick out. 2. lo lay with, count with; to enumerate, recount, narrate, describe; [οἷ. Eng. tale, Germ. ztihlen). II. to put word to word in speaking, join words together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. λαλεῖν, see under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in 1]. 2, 222 [yet ef. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48, 2; L. and S. s. vy. B. II. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com. use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for 728; often also for D8} (saying, dictum); very rarely for 1393; and soin N.T. 1. univ. a. absol. to…
Read the full entry →λέγω. (1). “‘I say, speak”: see e.g. P Par 47 {= Selections, Ῥ- 21 ff.), ¢. B.C. 153, which is addressed on the verso—mpds τοὺς τὴν ἀλήθεαν λέγοντες (—-as), P Fay 12378 (c. A.D. 100) γνώσομαι yap εἰ ἀληθῶς λέγι, “1 will find out whether he is speaking the truth,” P Ryl 11. 7615 (late li/A.D.) ἃ καὶ ἀναγνώσομαι λεγομένου τοῦ [π]ράγματος, “1 will read them when the case is argued” (Edd.), P Flor II. 1327 (A.D. 257) ἔλεζξ]αν πεποιηκέναι ταῦτα ἀγνοίᾳ, ‘they said they had done this in ignorance,” and the magical P Par 5741238 (iii/A.D.) (= Selectzons, p. 113) λόγος λεγόμενος ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, ‘ invocation to be uttered over the head (of the possessed one).”” For the phrase τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν, cf. I Cor 11°, Weiss (Meyer 15 ad 1) cites a sepulchral inscr. of husband and wife from Rhodes, /J/Ae 149 (ii/B.c.) ταὐτὰ λέγοντες ταὐτὰ φρονοῦντες ἤλθομεν τὰν ἀμέτρητον ὁδὸν εἰς ᾿Αἴδαν. (2). Closely…
Read the full entry →λέγω (legō) — to say.
λέγω,
__B pick up, etc.: tenses for signification 1 and 11, future λέξω [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist ἔλεξα [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle, future in passive sense λέξομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐλεξάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect ἐλέγμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—passive, aorist ἐλέχθην [Refs 8th c.BC+]-; post-[Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect εἴλοχα (κατ-, συν-), passive εἴλεγμαι, in these senses rarely λέλεγμαι (see. the compounds); also future λεγήσομαι (συλ-): aorist 2 ἐλέγην (κατ-, συν-):—gather, pick up, ὀστέα.. λέγωμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αἱμασιάς τε λέγων picking out stones for building walls, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—middle, gather for oneself, ἐπὶ δὲ ξύλα πολλὰ λέγεσθε [Refs 8th c.BC+]
Read the full entry →λέγω
lego
a primary verb; properly, to "lay" forth, i.e. (figuratively) relate
(in words (usually of systematic or set discourse; whereas 2036 and
5346 generally refer to an individual expression or speech
respectively; while 4483 is properly to break silence merely, and 2980
means an extended or random harangue)); by implication, to mean:--ask,
bid, boast, call, describe, give out, name, put forth, say(-ing, on),
shew, speak, tell, utter.
see GREEK for 2036
see GREEK for 5346
see GREEK for 4483
see GREEK for 2980
λέγω
v.
I say, speak
λέγω legō 2x
to lay, to arrange, to gather; to say, Mt. 1:20; to speak, make an address or speech, Acts 26:1; to say mentally, in thought, Mt. 3:9; Lk. 3:8; to say in written language, Mk. 15:28; Lk. 1:63; Jn. 19:37; to say, as distinguished from acting, Mt. 23:3; to mention, speak of, Mk. 14:71; Lk. 9:31; Read the full entry →
Verb-PAP-NPM — Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
V-PAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
1,357 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 107 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,255 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
76 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Counted over the 1,290 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.
ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.
πεφανέρωκεν γὰρ ἡμῖν διὰ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, ὅτι οὕτε θυσιῶν οὔτε ὁλοκαυτωμάτων οὔτε προσφορῶν χρῄζει, λέγων ὅτε μέν:
τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῷ μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων ,
ἑτερᾶς· νότου γῆ Τακοίμιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Χενσθώτου, ἀπηλιώτου Ἀείους, λιβὸς περίχωμα, τῆς δʼ ἄλλης λεγομένης Πκρώ· νότου γῆ Σενπελαίας, βορρᾶ γῆ Πανᾶτος ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς Ἀραμείους, ἢ οἳ ἂν
οἱ Φίβιος τοῦ Πανεχάτου υἱοί, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου, ἄλλης λεγομένης Φαμούνιος νότου γῆ Παθώτου τοῦ Πατοῦτος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πατσεοῦτος τοῦ Φίβιος, ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς
The Greek word ἄξιος (i.e., *axios*) means 'worthy' or 'deserving,' often used in contexts of value or merit. It is derived from the root meaning 'to weigh' and can refer to both positive and negative worth. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as in Matthew 10:10 and Luke 3:8, where it describes what is fitting or appropriate.
ἄξιος, -α, -ον
(< ἄγω, in sense, to weigh),
[in LXX for בֵּן (De 25:2), מָלֵא, שָׁוָה; freq. in Wis, II Mac;]
of weight, worth (often c. gen., cf. Pr 3:15 8:11), seq. πρός: Ro 8:18 (v. Field, Notes, 157);
befitting, meet: c. gen., Mt 3:8, Lk 3:8 23:41, Ac 26:20, I Co 16:4 (v. M, Pr., 216); absol., II Th 1:3;
ἄξιος, -a, -ov, (fr. ἄγω, ἄξω ; therefore prop. drawing down the scale; hence) a. weighing, having weight; with a gen. having the weight of (weighing as much as) another thing, of like value, worth as much: Bods ἄξιος, Hom. II. 23, 885; with gen. of price [W. 206 (194)], as ἄξ. δέκα μνῶν, common in Attic writ.; πᾶν τίμιον οὐκ ἄξιον αὐτῆς (σοφίας) ἐστι, Prov. iii. 15; viii. 11; οὐκ ἔστι σταθμὸς πᾶς ἄξιος ἐγκρατοῦς ψυχῆς, Sir. xxvi. 15; οὐκ ἄξια πρὸς τ. δόξαν are of no weight in comparison with the glory, i. 6. are not to be put on an equality with the glory, Ro. viii. 18; ef. Fritzsche ad loc. and W. 405 (378); [B. 540 (292)]. Ὁ. befitting, congruous, corresponding, τινός, to a thing: τῆς μετανοίας, Mt. iii. 8; Lk. iii. 8; Acts xxvi. 20; ἄξια ὧν ἐπράξαμεν, Lk. xxiii. 41. ἄξιόν ἐστι it is befitting: a. it is meet, 2 Th. i. 3 (4 Mace. xvii. 8); B. it is worth the while, foll. by τοῦ with…
Read the full entry →ἄξιος φοβεῖσθαι καὶ σέβεσθαι τὸ ἱερόν, the editors translate ‘or old.” P Oxy IT. 237}}:81. (a,b, 186) ὅπερ οὐ καλῶς ἐνδέχεται εἰ μὴ ἄνωθεν γένοιτο ἀντίγραφα, ‘this cannot be done adequately unless copies are made from the beginning” (Edd.). In P Oxy IV. 718% (a.p. 180-92) ἔτι δὲ ἄνῳβ[ε]ν τῶν δημοσίων ἀποδιδομένων, the editors translate ‘although the imposts have for years been paid.” But ‘‘ completely,” “from the beginning” may equally be the sense of ἄνωθεν : cf. 2. 745. 8. (c, A.D. 1) pl}. - Jvel.]- aL. . Jva ἄνωθεν γείνηται πάντα καὶ πάλιν ἑατοὺς ἀνασκευάζωμε[ν] μὴ οὔσης Χρήας, ‘‘in order that everything may not be completely . . . and we go bankrupt again without any necessity” (Edd.). In BGU II. 595° (a.p. 70-80) the meaning ‘‘ again,” ““a second time,” seems best to suit the context. A certain Sochotes, wishing to repay a loan, did not find his creditor— τοῦ δὲ σὲ μὴι εὑρεθῆναι…
Read the full entry →ἄξιος (axios) — worthy.
ἄξιος, ία, ιον
(ος, ον [Refs 4th c.AD+] counterbalancing,[Refs]: hence properly weighing as much, of like value, worth as much as, with genitive, βοὸς ἄ.[Refs 8th c.BC+]; νῦν δ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἑνὸς ἄξιοί εἰμεν Ἕκτορος we are not—all together—worth one Hector,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; so πολλοῦ ἄ. worth much, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παντός, τοῦ παντὸς ἄ., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παντὸς ἄ., with infinitive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λόγου ἄ., ={ἀξιόλογος}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; σπουδῆς, μνήμης ἄ., [Refs 6th c.BC+]; μείονος, ἐλάττονος ἄ., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also εἰς ὀγδοήκοντα μνᾶς ἄ. worth up to a sum of.., [Refs 4th c.BC+]
Read the full entry →ἄξιος
axios
probably from 71; deserving, comparable or suitable (as if drawing
praise):--due reward, meet, (un-)worthy.
see GREEK for 71
ἄξιος, ία, ιον
Adj
worthy, worthy of, deserving
ἄξιος ἄγω IV, and so properly weighing as much. weighing as much, of like value, worth as much as, c. gen., Il., Hdt.; οὐδ᾽ ἑνὸς ἄξιοί εἰμεν Ἕκτορος we are not worth one Hector, Il.; πάντων ἄξιον ἦμαρ, Lat. instar omnium, id. Il.; πολλοῦ ἄξιος worth much, Xen.; πλείστου ἄξιον, quantivis pretii, Thuc.; so, παντός, τοῦ παντὸς ἄξιον Plat.; λόγου ἄξιος, ῀ ἀξιόλογος, Hdt., etc.:—opp. to these are οὐδενὸς ἄξ. Theogn.; ὀλίγου, σμικροῦ ἄξ. Plat., etc.
c. dat. pers., σοὶ δ᾽ ἄξιόν ἐστιν ἀμοιβῆς 'tis worth a return to thee, i. e. will bring thee a return, Od.; πολλοῦ or πλείστου ἄξιον εἶναί τινι Xen., etc.
Read the full entry →Adj-NSM — Adjective · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
A-NSM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
41 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 41 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 11 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ὡς γὰρ τῶν κολοσσιαίων μεγεθῶν τὰς ἐμφάσεις καὶ ἡ βραχυτάτη σφραγὶς τυπωθεῖσα δέχεται, οὕτως τάχα που καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀναγραφείσης ἐν τοῖς νόμοις κοσμοποιίας ὑπερβάλλοντα κάλλη καὶ ταῖς μαρμαρυγαῖς τὰς τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων ψυχὰς ἐπισκιάζοντα βραχυτέροις…
Ἐπαινέσας δὲ αὐτοῦ τὴν ἀρετὴν ὁ θεός, ἀλλʼ οὐκ ἀπολεῖς, φησί, μισθοὺς οὓς ἄξιόν ἐστίν σε ἐπὶ τοιαύταις εὐπραγίαις κομίζεσθαι.
οὐδεὶς γνησιώτερον ἔμαθεν ἀπ̓ ἐμοῦ λόγον: ἀλλὰ οἶδα, ὅτι ἄξιοί ἐστε ὑμεῖς.
ὅσα ποτὲ ὕπηρχεν ἐν ταμιείωι, ἦν δʼ ὀλίγα, ἐγὼ αὐτὰ ἐφύτευσα, ἃ οὐκ ἦν ἄξια ἀποστολῆς. οὐ μὴν ἀλλὰ καὶ ταῦτα καὶ τὰ λοιπὰ τὰ ἁδρότατα αὐτῶν καὶ τὰ
Φιλαδελφείαι καὶ πρότερον Διο… τῶι Διῆτος ἀδελφῶι. εἰ δέ σοι μὴ ἀποδεδώκασιν, ἐκείνοις ἄξιον μέμφεσθαί ἐστιν. … ἔρρωσο. ἔτους δ, Φαῶθι … .
περιείλοντό μου ὑποζύγια Ζήνωνος δύο , ἃ ᾤχοντο ἔχοντες, ὧν ἓν ἄρρεν βαδιστικὸν λευκὸν ἄξιον δραχμῶν ρμ, χαλινὸν ἱππικὸν ἔχον ῥυτῆρας ἄξιον δραχμῶν δ, σφαίρωμα ἄξιον δραχμῶν γ, ἱδρῶια
εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.
εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…
Read the full entry →εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…
Read the full entry →εἰμί (eimi) — to be.
εἰμί
(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…
Read the full entry →εἰμί
eimi
the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a
primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,
have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,
2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.
see GREEK for 1488
see GREEK for 1498
see GREEK for 1511
see GREEK for 1527
see GREEK for 2258
see GREEK for 2071
see GREEK for 2070
see GREEK for 2075
see GREEK for 2076
see GREEK for 2771
see GREEK for 2468
see GREEK for 5600
εἰμί
v.
I am, exist
εἰμί eimi 2x
to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6
εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.
of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.
Read the full entry →Verb-PAI-2S — Verb · present · active · indicative · second person · singularpresent active indicative — an action in progress.
V-PAI-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: second Number: Singular
2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο
Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο
λαμβάνω (lambanō) means both 'to take' and 'to receive,' covering a wide range of applications from literal actions like grasping or seizing to more abstract uses such as accepting ideas or concepts. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts involving physical actions (e.g., taking bread in Mt 26:26) or receiving something (e.g., receiving a message in Jn 6:21). The lexicons note that the word can also imply a sense of violence or urgency in some contexts.
λαμβάνω,
[in LXX chiefly for לקח, also for נשׂא, לכד, אחז, etc.;]
to take, lay hold of: absol., Mt 26:26, Mk 14:22; c. acc. rei, Mt 5:40 26:52, al. mult.; c. acc. pers., Mt 21:35, Mk 12:3, al.; pleonastic λαβών (M, Pr., 230; Bl., §74, 2), Mt 13:31 14:19, al.; so also indic., Mk 7:27, Jo 19:1, 40, Re 8:5, al.; metaph., c. acc. rei, ἀφορμήν, Ro 7:8, 11; ὑδόδειγμα, Ja 5:10; id. c. acc. pers.…
Read the full entry →λαμβάνω; impf. ἐλάμβανον; fut. λήψομαι, (LT Tr WH λήμψομαι, an Alexandrian form; 568 8. v. M, μ); 2 aor. ἔλαβον (2 pers. plur. once [in Tdf. 7 after B*] ἐλάβατε, 1 Jn. ii. 27; see reff. s. v. ἀπέρχομαι, init.), impv. λάβε (Rey. x. 8 54.), not λαβέ (W. § 6,1 a.; B. 62 (54)); pf. εἴληφα, 2 pers. εἴληφας [and εἴληφες (Rev. xi. 17 WHI; see xomidw); on the use of the pf. interchangeably with an aor. (Rey. v. 7; viii. 5, ete.) οἵ. B. 197 (170) ; W. 272 (255); Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App. §§ 67, 68], ptep. εἰληφώς ; [Pass., pres. ptep. λαμβανόμενος ; pf. 3 pers. sing. εἴληπται, Jn. viii. 4 ὙΠ το. (rejected section)]; Sept. hundreds of times for n>), very often for 8wW3, also for 729 and several times for 108; [fr. Hom. down]; I. to take,i.e. 1. to take with the hand, lay hold of, any pers. or thing in order to use it: absol., where the context shows what is taken, Mt.…
Read the full entry →λαμβάνω in its ordinary sense of ‘‘ receive,” ‘‘ get,” as in Mt 78, Jn 357, is naturally very common, e.g. P Giss I. 67° (ii/a.p.) ἔλαβόν σου ἐπιστολήν, P Ryl II. 122} (a.p. 127) λαβὼν τὸ πιττάκιον τὸ ἀκόλουθον ποίει, “on receipt of this document, act in accordance with it” (Edd.), P Fay 1274 (ii/iii a.p.) | ἐὰ (= ἐὰν) λάβητε φαγὸν πέμψαι ἐμοὶ διὰ Karolrov, “if you get any lentils send them to me by Katoitus " (Edd.), and 76, 1355 (iv/A.D.) τὰ ἀργύρια ἃ ἔλαβες, “money which you received.” Similarly in connexion with money receipts, as 26. 1098 (early i/A.D.) ἀποχὴν θέλω λαβεῖν, “1 wish to get a receipt,” 20. 2113 (A.D. 134) ἀλλήλ[οις] ἀποχὰς τούς τε διδόντας καὶ τοὺς λαμβάν[ο]ντας, ‘‘that payer and payee shall mutually give receipts’’ (Edd.). Wilcken Ostr. i. p. 109 has pointed out that in the case of all ostraca receipts known to him the writers were Romans, but see 7hed Ostr 1058…
Read the full entry →λαμβάνω (lambanō) — to take.
λαμβάνω,
future λήψομαι (λήψω only late, variant in [LXX]; Ionic dialect λάψομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Doric dialectfuture 2nd pers. singular λαψῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+], infinitive λαμψεῖσθαι [Refs 2nd c.BC+]aorist 2 ἔλᾰβον, Epic dialect ἔλλᾰβον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect Iterat. λάβεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; written λάβε in middle Ms. of [Refs 4th c.BC+] Attic dialectaccusative to [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: perfect εἴληφα [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect, Doric dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive λελαβήκειν [Refs]: pluperfect εἰλήφειν [Refs 5th c.BC+] (κατα-); Doric dialect perfect subjunctive 3rd.pers. singular (παρ-) λελόνβῃ [Refs] —middle, aorist 2 ἐλαβόμην, Epic dialect ἐλλ-, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect reduplicate λελαβέσθαι [Refs]:—passive, future ληφθήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐλήφθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ἐλάφθην [Refs 5th…
Read the full entry →λαμβάνω
lambano
a prolonged form of a primary verb, which is use only as an alternate
in certain tenses; to take (in very many applications, literally and
figuratively (properly objective or active, to get hold of; whereas
1209 is rather subjective or passive, to have offered to one; while
138 is more violent, to seize or remove)):--accept, + be amazed,
assay, attain, bring, X when I call, catch, come on (X unto), +
forget, have, hold, obtain, receive (X after), take (away, up).
see GREEK for 1209
see GREEK for 138
λαμβάνω
v.
I receive, take
λαμβάνω lambanō 258x
to take, take up, take in the hand, Mt. 10:38; 13:31, 33; to take on one’s self, sustain, Mt. 8:17; to take, seize, seize upon, Mt. 5:40; 21:34; Lk. 5:26; 1 Cor. 10:13; to catch, Lk. 5:5; 2 Cor. 12:16; to assume, put on, Phil. 2:7; to make a rightful or successful assumption of, Jn. 3:27; to conceive, Acts 28:15; to take by…
Read the full entry →λαμβάνω from Root ΛΑΒ The orig. sense of the word is two-fold, one (more active) to take, and the other (more passive) to receive
to take:
to take hold of, grasp, seize, Hom., etc.; the part seized in gen., the whole in acc., τὴν πτέρυγος λάβεν caught her by the wing, Il.; γούνων λάβε κούρην Od., etc.:—then, with gen. of part only, ποδῶν, γούνων, κόρυθος λάβεν took hold of the feet, etc., Il.
to take by violence, seize, carry off as prize or booty, Hom.
λ. δίκην, ποινάς, Lat. sumere poenas, to exact punishment, Eur., etc.; v. infr. II. 3.
of passions, feelings, etc., to seize, Hom., etc.; of fever and sudden illnesses, to attack, Hdt., attic
of a deity, to seize, possess, τινά Hdt.: of darkness, and the like, to occupy, possess, Aesch.
Verb-2AAN — Verb · second aorist · active · infinitivesecond aorist active infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-2AAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5629
tak: Most of the very numerous examples of this word are still in good use and only a few call for special attention. "To take" in the sense of "capture" is still common, but when a person or living animal is in point, modern English usually adds "prisoner" or "captive." English Versions of the Bible not infrequently has this addition (Ge 14:14, etc.), but more commonly "take" is used without it (Jos 10:39; Job 5:13; Sirach 23:21; Joh 7:30, etc.). An occasional obscurity is thus caused, as in Ge 27:3, "take me venison" for "hunt venison for me." "To take advice" (2Ch…
265 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 76 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 258 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 650 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
εἶθ’, οἷα φιλεῖ, προσπεριειργάζετο, τίς ἡ τῶν ὁρατῶν δὴ τούτων οὐσία καὶ εἰ ἀγένητοι πεφύκασιν ἢ γενέσεως ἔλαβον ἀρχὴν καὶ τίς ὁ τρόπος τῆς κινήσεως καὶ τίνες αἱ αἰτίαι δι’ ὧν ἕκαστα οἰκονομεῖται·
ὡς Ἅβραμος ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἀσσυρίους ἐκστρατεύσας ἐνίκησε καὶ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους τῶν Σοδομιτῶν ἔσωσε καὶ τὴν λείαν ἣν ἔλαβον ἀφείλετο.
λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.
Λατοπολίτου, ἣν ἐωνήσατο ἐκ βασιλικοῦ ἐν τῶι ε ἔτει πρὸς τὰ ταύτης ἐκφόρια, καὶ λαβὼν τὴν εἰθισμένην διαγραφὴν ἐπικεχωρηκέναι ταύτηι τὴν ἑαυτοῦ δ μερίδα, ὃς καὶ παρὼν ἐπὶ τοῦ
Λατοπολίτου, ἣν ἐωνήσατο ἐκ βασιλικοῦ ἐν τῷ πέμπτωι ἔτει πρὸς τὰ τῆς γῆς ἐκφόρια λαβὼν τὴν εἰθισμένην διαγραφήν. ὁ Ἁρκοννῆσις ἐπικεχώρηκεν ταύτῃ τὴν τετάρτην μερίδα πρὸς πυροῦ ἀρτάβας δέκα
τῆς κώμης καθέσταται Πατσεοῦς Πατῆτος ὁ τὴν ἐντολὴν ἐπιδεικνὺς χειρογραφήσας ὡς εἴθισται καὶ διαστολὴν λαβὼν προ
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-ASN — Article · accusative · singular · neuteraccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
T-ASN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
βιβλίον is a diminutive form of βίβλος, meaning a paper, scroll, or written document. It covers a range of meanings from a simple letter to a book or roll, and is used in various New Testament contexts, including references to divorce documents (Mt 19:7) and sacred texts (Re 20:12). The word has also been associated with petitions and official documents in historical texts.
βιβλίον Wilcken shows that this latter word was the ordinary term for ‘‘petition” till the end of the third century: see 6. g. P Oxy VII. 10324 (A.D. 162) οὗ ἐπέδομεν Οὐολουσ[ίῳ Miatkiava τὼ ἡγεμονεύσαντι βιβλειδίου. . . ἀντίγραφον, ““copy of the petition which we presented to Volusius Maecianus, ex-praefect,” P Tebt 11. 2938 (c. A.p. 187) πρὸς τὸ ἐπιδοθέν σοι βιβλείδιον ὑπὸ M., ‘‘ with regard to the petition presented to you by M.,” P Oxy I. 79" (a notice of death—a.p. 181-92) (= Se/ections, p. 89) διὸ ἐπιδίδωμι [τὸ] βιβλείδιον ἀξιῶν ταγῆναι αὐτὸν ἐν τῇ τῶν τετελευτηκότων τάξει, “I therefore present this petition and ask that he be enrolled in the roll of the dead,” and P Grenf II. 61" (A.D. 194-8) ὅθεν ἐπιδί[δω]μι κ[α]ὶ ἀξιῶ ἐν καταχωρισμῷ γενέσθαι τοῦτο βιβλίδιον. rom the beginning of the fourth century βιβλίον or λίβελλος as a rule displaced βιβλίδιον in this connexion, e. g. P Oxy…
Read the full entry →βιβλίον (biblion) — scroll.
βιβλίον
or βυβλίον, τό, strip of βύβλος, [Refs 4th c.BC+]: hence, paper, document, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; β. ἀποστασίου notice of divorce, [NT]
2. ={βιβλίδιον}, petition to the Government, = Latin libellus, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
3. ={δέλτος}, tablet, [LXX]
II. book, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.2. book as the division of a work, ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ β. [Refs 1st c.AD+]
II.3. τὰ β. place in which books are kept, library, ἀνεθήκατε εἰς τὰ β. [Refs 1st c.AD+]
II.4. τὰ β. τὰ ἅγια the sacred books or [LXX]
βιβλίον
biblion
a diminutive of 976; a roll:--bill, book, scroll, writing.
see GREEK for 976
βιβλίον, ου, τό
n.n.
a papyrus roll
βιβλίον Dim. of βίβλος a paper, scroll, letter, Hdt., Ar., etc.; often written βυβλίον.
Noun-ASN — Noun · accusative · singular · neuteraccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
N-ASN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
skrol.
See ROLL.
35 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 34 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 66 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
βιβλίον δὲ εἴρηκε τὸν τοῦ θεοῦ λόγον, ᾧ συμβέβηκεν ἐγγράφεσθαι καὶ ἐγχαράττεσθαι τὰς τῶν ἄλλων συστάσεις.
ἤδη τοίνυν τοὺς ἐντευξομένους τοῖς βιβλίοις παρακαλῶ τὴν γνώμην θεῷ προσανέχειν καὶ δοκιμάζειν τὸν ἡμέτερον νομοθέτην, εἰ τήν τε φύσιν ἀξίως αὐτοῦ κατενόησε καὶ τῇ δυνάμει πρεπούσας ἀεὶ τὰς πράξεις ἀνατέθεικε πάσης καθαρὸν τὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ φυλάξας…
λέγει οὖν Μωϋσῆς Ἰησοῦ, υἱῷ Ναυή, ἐπιθεὶς τοῦτο τὸ ὄνομα, ὁπότε ἔπεμψεν αὐτὸν κατάσκοπον τῆς γῆς: Λάβε βιβλίον εἰς τὰς χεῖράς σου καὶ γράψον, ἃ λέγει κύριος, ὅτι ἐκκόψει ἐκ ῥιζῶν τὸν οἶκον πάντα τοῦ Ἀμαλὴκ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ ἐπ’ ἐσχάτων τῶν ἡμερῶν.
χιλίας , παρὰ δὲ τῶν περὶ τὸν Ἡρακλείδην ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς … … τετρώβολον· ἅπερ βιβλία παραδώσει τοῖς εκ … ι … τῶν δὲ περὶ τὸν Ἡρακλείδην προτιθέντων ὅτι ὁ
τοῦ ια ἔτους διαλογισμοῦ ὑπομνηματισμῶν … … … κέναι καὶ ἀξιοῦντα παραλαμβάνειν αὐτὸν τὰ βιβλία … ναι τῷ γραμματεύσαντι Λεωνίδῃ ρα … τιν αὐτὸν εἰς τὴν β
ἄλλα παρὰ ταῦτα ποιήσῃ. ἐπεὶ δὲ καὶ τοῦτό τινες ἐμέμψαντο ὡς αὐτοὶ μὲν τὰ βιβλία προσφέροντες οἷς ὀφείλουσιν, ἐκείνους δὲ μὴ βουλομένους παρʼ αὐτῶν λαμβάνειν ἵνα τὴν παρολκὴν ἐξωνήσωνται
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
ἀνοίγω (anoigo) means 'to open' and is derived from the components ἀνά and οἴγω. It covers a range of meanings, from physically opening doors or gates (Acts 5:19) to metaphorically opening opportunities or welcoming (Revelation 3:20). The verb appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts of spiritual or divine revelation.
ἀν-οίγω
(ἀνά, οἴγω = οἴγνυμι),
[in LXX chiefly for פָּתַח;]
to open;
ἀν-οίγω ; (dvd, οἴγω i. 6. οἴγνυμι) ; fut. ἀνοίξω; 1 aor. ἤνοιξα and (Jn. ix. 14 and as a var. elsewh. also) ἀνέῳξα (an earlier form) [and ἠνέῳξα WH in Jn. ix. 17, 32 (cf. Gen. viii. 6), so Tr (when corrected), but without iota subser.; see I, +]; 2 pf. avéwya (to be or stand open; cf. Bum. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 250 sq.; (Rutherford, New Phryn. Ρ. 247; Veitch s. v.]; the Attic writ. give this force mostly to the pf. pass.); Pass., [pres. dvotyoua Mt. vii. 8LTrtxt. Wi mrg.; Lk. xi. 10 Tr mrg. WH mrg.]; pf. ptep. ἀνεῳγμένος and ἠνεῳγμένος, (ἠνοιγμένος Acts ix. 8 Tdf.); 1 aor. ἀνεῴχθην, ἠνεῴχθην. and ἠνοίχθην. inf. aveῳχθῆναι (with double augm. Lk. iii. 21); 2 aor. ἠνοίγην (the usual later form); 1 fut. ἀνοιχθήσομαι (Lk. xi. 9 Tdf., 10 LT); 2 fut. ἀνοιγήσομαι ; (on these forms, in the use of which both codd. and edd. differ much, ef. ( Tdf. Proleg. p. 121 sq.]; WH. App. pp. 161, 170; Bim.…
Read the full entry →ἀνοίγω. That ancient scribes were almost capable of sympathy with modern school-boys in writing the augmented forms of this intractable verb is shown by frequent misspellings in late papyri: thus PSI II. 1329 (iii/a.p.) ἀνῷχθαι. From Ptolemaic papyri we have the regular forms ἠνώιξαμεν P Petr IT. 37 τὸ ?, and ἀνεωιγμένον 20. 2". 5, also ἀνοῖξαι 6. III. Ῥ- 133The phrase of Mt 2" is nearly paralleled in Sy// 60132 (iii/B.C.) ἀνοιγόντων δὲ of ἐξετασταὶ κατ᾽ ἐνιαυτὴν (/. -τὸν) τὸν θησαυρόν : so 7. 6532" (the Andania ‘‘ Mysteries” inscr., in dialect—B.C. 91), 587°? (B.c. 329-8) τῶι τοὺς θησαυροὺς ἀνοίξαντι. That of Rev 59 etc. occurs in Sy? 7904? (i/a.D.) τὰς σφραγῖδας ἀνοιξάτω. Close to this is its use for the “opening ” of a will, as P Ryl II. 1099 (A.p. 235—a stilted document with δυεῖν and υἱέας }) ἐκ διαθήκης τῆς καὶ ἀνοιχθε[(σ]ης κατὰ τὸ ἔθος. We may quote OG/S 22238 (B.c. 266-1)…
Read the full entry →ἀνοίγω (anoigō) — to open.
Included with: ἀνοίγ-νῡμι
[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνοίγω [Refs 5th c.BC+], and Attic dialect as [Refs 4th c.BC+]: imperfect ἀνἔῳγον[Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἀναοίγεσκον[Refs 8th c.BC+]: future ἀνοίξω[Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἀνέῳξα[Refs 5th c.BC+]participle ἀνεῴξας [Refs]; also ἤνοιξα[Refs 5th c.BC+] and in late Prose; Ionic dialect ἄνοιξα[Refs 5th c.BC+]; poetry ἀνῷξα[Refs 3rd c.BC+] M.: perfect ἀνέῳχα[Refs 4th c.BC+]: pluperfect ἀνεῴγει[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, ἀνοίγνῠμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: late future ἀνοιχθήσομαι[LXX+5th c.BC+]: perfect ἀνέῳγμαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; later ἤνοιγμαι (δι-) best reading in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; pluperfect ἀνέῳκτο[Refs 5th c.BC+](perfect [Refs] is used in passive sense in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and later Prose, as [NT+1st c.AD+] (though he condemns it [Refs]; but in Attic dialect, only [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
Read the full entry →ἀνοίγω
anoigo
from 303 and oigo (to open); to open up (literally or figuratively, in
various applications):--open.
see GREEK for 303
ἀνοίγω
v.
I open
Verb-AAN — Verb · aorist · active · infinitiveaorist active infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-AAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5658
o'-p'-n: In the Old Testament represents chiefly pathach, but also other words, as galah, "to uncover"; of the opening of the eyes in vision, etc. (thus Balaam, Nu 22:31; 24:4; compare Job 33:16; 36:10; Ps 119:18; Jer 32:11,14). In the New Testament the usual word is anoigo (of opening of mouth, eyes, heavens, doors, etc.). A peculiar word, trachelizomai (literally, to have the neck bent back, to be laid bare), is used for "laid open" before God in Heb 4:13.
78 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 78 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 82 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„ἰδὼν δὲ κύριος ὅτι μισεῖται Λεία, ἤνοιξε τὴν μήτραν αὐτῆς, Ῥαχὴλ δὲ ἦν στεῖρα" (Gen.
ἔπειτα τῆς λάρνακος περὶ ἄκραν τινὰ ὄρους σταθείσης κατὰ τὴν Ἀρμενίαν συνεὶς ὁ Νῶχος ἀνοίγει τʼ αὐτὴν καὶ θεασάμενος γῆν βραχεῖαν περὶ αὐτὴν ἐπὶ χρηστοτέρας ἤδη γεγονὼς ἐλπίδος ἠρέμει.
λέγει οὖν ὁ προφήτης: Ἐγὼ κύριος, ὁ θεός σου, ἐκάλεσά σε ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ κρατήσω τῆς χειρός σου καὶ ἐνισχύσω σε, καὶ ἔδωκά σε εἰς διαθήκην γένους, εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς τυφλῶν καὶ ἐξαγαγεῖν ἐκ δεσμῶν πεπεδημένους καὶ ἐξ οἴκου φυλακῆς…
καὶ τῶν μετόχων τόποι καὶ ἐπί τι μέρος κοινὴ εἴσοδος καὶ ἔξοδος εἰς ἣν ἀνέῳγεν θύρα, βορρᾶ ῥύμη βασιλικὴ, λιβὸς τοῦ προγεγραμμένου Κατοίτου τοῦ Μεγχείους καὶ τῶν μετόχων οἰκία
Γερμανικοῦ χωρὶς πάσης ὑπερθέσεως· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶ καθὰ γέγραπται ἐξεῖναι σοὶ διὰ σεαυτοῦ ἀνοῖξαι τὸν οἶκον καὶ πωλεῖν τὸ νίτρον κατὰ τὴν πολιτευομένην τούτου τιμὴν καὶ μεταλαβεῖσθαι τὸ
ὧν κεκλήρωνται θύρας καὶ φῶτα θυρίδων τρία , τὸν δὲ Ὧρον Τεσενούφεως ἑαυτῶι ἀνοίγειν … υ κεκλη … … … υ … δ … σειτητην ἀπὸ νότου κατʼ
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-APF — Article · accusative · plural · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
T-APF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
σφραγίς (sphragis) refers to a seal or signet, often used to denote authenticity or protection. It encompasses the physical object itself, such as a signet-ring, as well as its impression, which can serve various purposes, including marking documents or indicating ownership. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts related to authority and proof, notably in Revelation and Paul's letters, where it signifies a mark of genuineness or confirmation.
σφραγίς, -idos, ἡ, (akin, apparently, to the verb φράσσω or φράγνυμι), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for Onin, a seal; 1.6. a. the seal placed upon books [ οἵ. B.D. s.v. Writing, sub fin.; Gardthausen, Palaeogr. p. 27]: Rev. ν. 1; λῦσαι tas opp., ib. 2,5 [Ree.]; ἀνοῖξαι, ib. [5 GLT Tr WH], ΟΡ ὙΠ 155} 419. 12} ville 1- b. α signet-ring: Rev. vii. 2. ce. the inscription or impression made by a seal: Rey. ix. 4 (the name of God and Christ stamped upon their foreheads must be meant here, as is evident from xiv. 1); 2 Tim. ii. 19. d. that by which anything is confirmed, proved, authenticated, as by a seal, (a token or proof): Ro. iv. 11; 1Co.ix.2. [Cf. BB. DD. s. v. Seal.]
σφραγίς δραχμὰς εἴκοσι, P Oxy I. τ1617 (ii/a.p.) ἔπεμψα ὑμεῖν. .. κ[ἴστην σταφυλῆς λείαν καλῆς καὶ σφυρίδα φοίνικος καλοῦ ἐσφραγι(σμένας), “1 send you a box of very excellent grapes anda basket of excellent dates under seal” (Edd.), 76. III. 528!8 (ii/A.D.) ἔδωκα τῇ UB μετὰ τῶν σῶν ἐπιστολῶν ἐσ{σ)φραγιΐμένα, “1 gave the letter sealed (to the messenger) on the 12‘ together with letters for you (?) ” (Edd.), τὸ. VI. 92938 (ii/ili A.D.) ταῦτα δὲ πάντα συνενῆι εἰς τὸν χιτῶνα τὸν καροῖνον, καὶ ἐσφραγίσθη yr λευκῇ, ‘‘all these were inside the brown tunic, and it was sealed with white χαρτάριν ἔλαβεν Σερηνίων ἐσίσ)φραγισμένον, ‘* Serenion took the papyrus sealed,” P Lond 171 ὁ15 (iii/A.p.) (= 11. p. 176) διέθετό μοι διαθήκην α[ὐ]τοῦ ἐσφραγισμένην, and P Oxy XIV, 16777 (iii/A.p.) τὸ ἐντολικὸν TItodepatros ὡς ἔδ[ω]κεν por ἐσφραγισμένον, ‘the order for Ptolemais sealed as he gave it to me”…
Read the full entry →σφραγίς (sphragis) — seal.
σφρᾱγ-ίς,
Ionic dialectσφρηγίς, ῖδος, ἡ: Aeolic dialect accusative σφρᾶγιν [Refs 4th c.AD+]:—seal, signet, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; distinguished from δακτύλιος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῶν σφραγῖδας ἐχόντων, i.e. fops, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of the public seal of a state, [ὁ ἐπιστάτης] τηρεῖ τὴν δημοσίαν σ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τὸν στρατηγὸν καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς σ. keeper of the privy seal, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]
2. gem or stone for a ring, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς τῶν δακτυλίων σ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]
3. generally, gem, κιθάραν.. σφραγῖσι.. κατακεκοσμημένην [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
II. impression of a signet-ring, seal, σ. δακτυλίου Legal Solonis cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παρασημήνασθαι σασθαι σ. to counterfeit it, [Refs]…
σφραγίς
sphragis
probably strengthened from 5420; a signet (as fencing in or protecting
from misappropriation); by implication, the stamp impressed (as a mark
of privacy, or genuineness), literally or figuratively:--seal.
see GREEK for 5420
σφραγίς, ῖδος, ἡ
n.f.
a signet-ring, impression of a seal, the proof
σφραγίς sphragis 16x
a seal, a signet ring, Rev. 7:2; an inscription on a seal, motto, 2 Tim. 2:19; a seal, the impression of a seal, Rev. 5:1, 2, 5, 9, 6:1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 12; 8:1; a seal, a distinctive mark, Rev. 9:4; a seal, a token, proof, 1 Cor. 9:2; a token of guarantee, Rom. 4:11*
σφραγίς σφρα_γίς, ionic σφρηγίς, ῖδος, a seal, signet, seal-ring, Hdt., Ar., etc.
the gem or stone for a ring, Hdt., Luc.
the impression of a signet-ring, a seal, Soph., Thuc.:—metaph., σφρηγὶς ἐπικείσθω τοῖσδε, as a warrant, Theogn.; γλώσσῃ σφρ. ἐπικείσθω Anth.
Noun-APF — Noun · accusative · plural · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
N-APF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine
- Called signet
Ge 38:18,25
- Precious stones set in gold used as
- Inscriptions upon, alluded to
- Generally worn as rings or bracelets
- IMPRESSIONS OF
. Frequently taken in clay
16 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 16 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 10 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ὡς γὰρ τῶν κολοσσιαίων μεγεθῶν τὰς ἐμφάσεις καὶ ἡ βραχυτάτη σφραγὶς τυπωθεῖσα δέχεται, οὕτως τάχα που καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀναγραφείσης ἐν τοῖς νόμοις κοσμοποιίας ὑπερβάλλοντα κάλλη καὶ ταῖς μαρμαρυγαῖς τὰς τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων ψυχὰς ἐπισκιάζοντα βραχυτέροις…
μεθʼ ἡμέραν δὲ ἀναστὰς ἐπὶ τὸν λάκκον ἦλθε καὶ σωζομένην τὴν σφραγῖδα εὑρών, ᾗ σημηνάμενος τὸν λίθον κατελελοίπει, ἀνοίξας ἀνεβόησε καλῶν τὸν Δανίηλον καὶ πυνθανόμενος εἰ σώζεται.
ἀλλ̓ ἐρεῖς: Καὶ μὴν περιτέτμηται ὁ λαὸς εἰς σφραγῖδα.
μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει
κλείδου … … ὑδραγωγός … ἐδάφη … καὶ ἡ ἑξῆς εἰσαγομένη σφραγίς … … … κατοικικῆς ἄρουραι β … τῆς σφραγῖδος ὧν … καὶ ἐπί τι
δραχμὰς υ. ἐὰν δὲ πταίσῃ τι ἐξ αὐτῶν κατὰ τὴν ὁδὸν, οἴσομεν ὑμῖν τὴν σφραγῖδα καὶ οὐδὲν ζητηθήσεται πρὸς ἡμᾶς. ἔτους λα Μάρκου Αὐρηλίου Κομμόδου Ἀντωνίνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου
αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.
αὐτός, -ή, -ό,
determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).
Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);
self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…
αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…
Read the full entry →αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…
Read the full entry →αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.
αὐτός
(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),
I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
αὐτός
autos
from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea
of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used
(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the
proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,
the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-
)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,
- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),
those, together, very, which. Compare 848.
see GREEK for 109
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 848
αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό
Pers.pr.
he, she, it, they, them, same
αὐτός autos 5x
self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1
αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:
oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.
of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.
by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.
in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.
Pron-GSN — Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · neutergenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
P-GSN Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος
ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος
The Greek word ὅτι (hoti) is a conjunction primarily meaning 'that' or 'because.' It introduces objective clauses, often following verbs of perception or declaration, and can also serve as a causal particle. The New Testament frequently employs it in this way, such as in Matthew 5:4-12. There is some variation in how lexicons describe its usage, particularly regarding its pleonastic function in direct discourse.
ὅτι [properly neut. of ὅστις], a conjunction [fr. Hom. down], (Lat. quod [ef. W. § 53,8 b.; B. § 139, 51; § 149, 87), marking I. the substance or contents (of a statement), that; 1. joined to verbs of saying and declaring (where the ace. and infin. is used in Lat.) : ἀναγγέλλειν, Acts xiv. 27; διηγεῖσθαι, Acts ix. 273; εἰπεῖν, Mt. xvi. 20; xxviii. 7,13; Jn. vii. 42; xvi. 15; 1Co.i.15; λέγειν, Mt. iii. 9; vill. 11; Mk. iii. 28; Lk. xv.7; Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. iv. 9 [T Tr WH om. L br. ὅτι}; ix. 2, and very often; προεἰρηκέναι, 2 Co. vii. 3; before the ὅτι in Acts xiv. 22 supply λέγοντες, contained in the preceding παρακαλοῦντες [ef. B. §151, 11]; ὅτι after γράφειν, 1 Co. ix.10; 1 Jn. 11. 12-14; μαρτυρεῖν, Mt. xxiii. 31; Jn. i. 34; iii. 28; iv. 44; ὁμολογεῖν, Heb. xi. 13; δεικνύειν, Mt. xvi. 21; δηλοῦν, 1 Co. i. 11; διδάσκειν, 1 Co. xi. 14. after ἐμφανίζειν. Heb. xi. 14; δῆλον (ἐστίν), 1 Co.…
Read the full entry →οτι. (1) For ὅτι, ‘‘that,” introducing an objective clause after verbs of knowing, saying, etc., cf. P Tebt II. 4098 (A.D. 5) εἰδὼ[ς ὅ]τι ἐξίι)ουσίαν αὐτῶν ἔχει kal Λυσίμαχος kal σύ, ΚΕ knew that both you and Lysimachus had plenty of them” (Edd.), P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) νομίσας ὅτι (cf. Mt 517) κιχρᾷς por αὐτούς, ““ consider that you are lending them (sc. staters) to me’’ (Edd.), BGU III. 8464* (ii/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 93) γεινώσκειν σαι θέλω, ὅτι οὐχ [HA] Lov, ὅτι ἀναβένις (1. ἀναβαίνεις) els τὴν μητρόπολιν, “1 wish you to know that I had no hope that you were coming up to the metropolis,” 74.9 αἴγραψά σοι, ὅτι γυμνός εἰμει, “1 wrote you that I am naked,” and P Tebt II. 420+ (iii/A.D.) οἴδατε ὅτι ἀπὸ ζημίας ἠμί, ‘‘ You know that I am blameless.” Ὅτι, however, is frequently omitted, e.g. BGU IIL. 8153(ii/a.p.) γεινόσκιν σε θέλω [τὴ]ν ἐπιστολήν σου ἔλαβε (corrected by another hand…
Read the full entry →ὅτι (hoti) — that/since: that.
ὅτῐ,
Epic dialect ὅττῐ (both in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: conjunction, to introduce an objective clause, that, after Verbs of seeing or knowing, thinking or saying; in [Refs 8th c.BC+] —Usage:
I. when ὅτι introduces a statement of fact:
I. a in [Refs 8th c.BC+] always with indicative, the tense following the same rules as in English, ἤγγειλ᾽ ὅττι ῥά οἱ πόσις ἔκτοθι μίμνε πυλάων [Refs 8th c.BC+]
I. b in Attic dialect, ὅτι takes indicative after primary tenses, indicative or optative after secondary tenses, e.g. ἐνδείκνυμαι ὅτι οὐκ ἔστι σοφός [Refs 5th c.BC+] news came that Megara had (literal has) revolted, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes optative and indicative are found in the same sentence, ἔλεγον, ὅτι Κῦρος μὲν τέθνηκεν, Ἀριαῖος δὲ πεφευγὼς.. εἴη [Refs 5th c.BC+].. and the accusative with infinitive…
ὅτι
hoti
neuter of 3748 as conjunction; demonstrative, that (sometimes
redundant); causative, because:--as concerning that, as though,
because (that), for (that), how (that), (in) that, though, why.
see GREEK for 3748
ὅτι
Cj.
that, since, because
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
be-kos' (hina, "in order that"): "The multitude rebuked them, because (AV; the Revised Version (British and American) "that") they should hold their peace" (Mt 20:31).
1,329 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,293 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Μωυσῆς δὲ καὶ φιλοσοφίας ἐπ’ αὐτὴν φθάσας ἀκρότητα καὶ χρησμοῖς τὰ πολλὰ καὶ συνεκτικώτατα τῶν τῆς φύσεως ἀναδιδαχθεὶς ἔγνω δή, ὅτι ἀναγκαιότατόν ἐστιν ἐν τοῖς οὖσι τὸ μὲν εἶναι δραστήριον αἴτιον, τὸ δὲ παθητόν, καὶ ὅτι τὸ μὲν δραστήριον ὁ τῶν ὅλων…
ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.
ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.
καὶ τὴν εἰκοστὴν τοῦ ἐγκυκλίου καὶ τὰ ἄλλα τὰ καθήκοντα. … ται Προῖτος, καθʼ ὅτι πρόκειται … ἑξήκοντα ἓξ τετρωβόλου καὶ τῆς … … τοπογραμματέως τοῦ Παθυρίτου … ἀρουρῶν
ι τοῖς ἐνκαλουμένοις τὸ ἀντίγραφον τῆς ἐντεύξεως λαβεῖν παρ … τ … … πίστιν ὅτι ἀπαντησα … ἐπὶ τὸ ἐν τῆι αὐλῆι κριτήριον ἐν ἡμέραις λ οὐκ ο
δʼ ἐπιχειροῦντας μὴ ὑπακούειν σου … υτέραι στάσει ἐχομένους ἀσφαλισάμενος μέχρι τοῦ καὶ ἡμᾶς ὅτι τάχος ἐπιβαλεῖν πρὸς σέ. ἔρρωσοἔρρωσο ἔτους κϛ Φαμενὼθ ιϛ
σφάζω (sphazō) means to slay or slaughter, particularly in the context of sacrifices, where it often refers to animals. It can also apply to killing humans, as seen in 1 John 3:12 and Revelation 6:4. The word is derived from a root meaning to cut the throat, and its usage spans from classical literature to the New Testament.
σφάζω, Attic opdrrw: fut. σφάξω, Rev. vi. 41, T Tr WH; 1 aor. ἔσφαξα; Pass., pf. ptep. ἐσφαγμένος ; 2 aor. ἐσφάγην ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. very often for um, to slay, slaughter, butcher: prop., ἀρνίον, Rev. v. 6, 12; xiii. 8; τινά, to put to death by violence (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down), 1 Jn. iii. 12; Rev. v. 9; vi. 4, 9; xvili. 24. κεφαλὴ ἐσφαγμένη εἰς θάνατον, mortally wounded [R.V. smitien unto death], Rev. xiii. 3. [Comr.: κατα-σφάζω. |
σφάζω, “slay, slaughter” : bre ἐσημάνθη, ὅτι ἐσφάγη [Σ]εμπρώνιος, and OG/S 697° ἐσφαγμένοι ἐν ὅρμῳ Ilovxews. See also the magic P Osl I. 15 (iv/A.D.) ὃ τὸν ἴδιον ἀδελφὸν σφάξας (with the editor’s note). For the form σφάττω (cf. Wackernagel Hed/enzstica, p. 24) see Sy/Z 615 (= *1024)*> (B.c. 200) πρὸς tat β[ωμ]ῶι σ[φά]ττετίαι] (sc. &pvos). The verb is used hyperbolically in P Oxy II. 25938 (A.D. 23) βλέπε pe πῶς pe ἡ μήτηρ ἡμῶν [E]odate χάριν Tov χειρογράφου : the editors compare the similar use of φονεύω in P Lond 113. 12(d)** (vi/vii A.p.) (=I. p. 227) ὃ χρεώστης ἐφ[ὀ]νευσέν pe. In Pontic and certain other dialects σπάζω takes the place of σφάζω: Thumb Hazadbook, p. 18. For σφαγιάζω cf. Syd/ 920 (=*685)*? (B.c. 139) σφαγιασθέντος ἱερείου. »»…
Read the full entry →σφάζω (sphazō) — to slaughter.
σφάζω,
[Refs 8th c.BC+] downwards, σφάττω, compare Σφαττόμενος title of play by [Refs 4th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect σφάδδω [Refs]: future σφάξω [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἔσφαξα [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect ἔσφᾰκα, known from pluperfect ἐσφάκειν [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:—passive, future σφᾰγήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist ἐσφάγην [ᾰ] Trag. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; less frequently ἐσφάχθην, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἔσφαγμαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—slay, slaughter, properly by cutting the throat (see. σφαγή 11)[Refs 8th c.BC+] always of cattle, μῆλ᾽ ἁδινὰ σφάζουσι καὶ εἰλίποδας ἕλικας βοῦς [Refs 8th c.BC+]
Read the full entry →σφάζω
sphazo
a primary verb; to butcher (especially an animal for food or in
sacrifice) or (generally) to slaughter, or (specially), to maim
(violently):--kill, slay, wound.
σφάζω
v.
I slay
σφάζω sphazō 10x
also spelled σφάττω, to slaughter, kill, slay; pr. used of animals killed in sacrifice, etc., Rev. 5:6, 9, 12; 13:8; of persons, etc., 1 Jn. 3:12; Rev. 6:4, 9; 18:24; to wound mortally, Rev. 13:3*
σφάζω Root ΣΦΑΓ to slay, slaughter, properly by cutting the throat (v. σφαγή II), Hom.
esp. to slaughter victims for sacrifice, Il., Eur.
generally to slay, kill, first applied to human victims, Pind., Trag.; σφ. τινὰ ἐς τὸν κρητῆρα so that the blood run into the bowl, Hdt.
Verb-2API-2S — Verb · second aorist · passive · indicative · second person · singularsecond aorist passive indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-2API-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Passive Mood: Indicative Person: second Number: Singular
10 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 10 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 57 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Ἄδαμος δὲ ὁ πρῶτος ἐκ γῆς γενόμενος, ἀπαιτεῖ γὰρ ἡ διήγησις τὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ λόγον, Ἀβέλου μὲν ἐσφαγμένου, Κάιος δὲ διὰ τὸν ἐκείνου φόνον πεφευγότος, παιδοποιίας ἐφρόντιζε, καὶ δεινὸς εἶχεν αὐτὸν γενέσεως ἔρως ἔτη τριάκοντʼ ἤδη καὶ διακόσια ἠνυκότα…
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The Greek word ἀγοράζω (i.e., *agorazō*) means to buy or purchase, particularly in a market context. It can also imply redeeming or acquiring something at a price. In the New Testament, it appears in various forms, such as in Matthew 21:12 and Revelation 5:9, where it conveys both literal and metaphorical meanings of buying or redeeming.
ἀγοράζω
(< ἀγορά),
[in LXX chiefly for שׁבר, קנה;]
to frequent the ἀγορά (Hdt., al.).
to buy in the market, purchase (Xen., al.; LXX; in π. very common in deeds of sale, v. MM, VGT, s.v.): absol., Mt 21:12, Mk 11:15; c. acc. rei, Mt 13:44, 46, al.; seq. παρά, c. gen. pers., Re 3:18 (LXX, Polyb.); ἐκ, Mt 27:7; c. gen. pret., Mk 6:37, al.; metaph., I Co 6:20 7:23, II Pe 2:1, Re 5:9 14:3…
ἀγοράζω ; [impf. ἠγόραζον ; fut. ἀγοράσω] ; 1 aor. ἦγόpaca; Pass., pf. ptep. ἠγορασμένος ; 1 20r. ἠγοράσθην; (ἀγορά); 1. to frequent the market-place. 2. to buy (properly, in the market-place), [Arstph., Xen., al.]; used a. literally: absol.. Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45 [not G T Tr WH]; τί, Mt. xiii. 44, 46; xiv. 15 and parallel pass., Jn. iv. 8; vi.5; with παρά and gen. of the pers. fr. whom, Rev. iii. 18, [Sept., Polyb.]; ἐκ and gen. of price, Mt. xxvii. 7; simple gen. of price, Mk. vi. 37. b. figuratively: Christ is said . to have purchased his disciples i. e. made them, as it were, his private property, 1 Co. vi. 20 [this is commonly understood of God; but cf. Jn. xvii. 9,10]; 1 Co. vii. 23 (with gen. of price added; see τιμή, 1); 2 Pet. ii. 1. He is also said to have bought them for God ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ, by shedding his blood, Rev. v. 9; they, too, are spoken of as…
Read the full entry →ἀγοράζω. The verb (MGr = “‘ buy ”) is common in deeds of sale, e. g. P Lond 882*4 (z.c. 101) (= III. p. 14) ἣν ἠγόρασεν παρὰ O., 26. 1208) (8.6, 97) (=IIT. p. 19). It is used of the purchase of slaves in OG/S 33878 (the will of Attalus II1.—B.c. 133): cf. 1 Cor 650, 7% τιμῆς ἠγοράσθητε (Deissmann LA Z, Ρ. 328). So P Oxy VIII. 11495 ff. (ii/a.p.) ἀ[γο]ράσαι παρὰ Tacap[a]mlwvos ὃν ἔχει δοῦλον Σαραπίωνα, ‘to buy from Tasarapion her slave Sarapion,” a/. Both the verb and the corresponding substantive are found in P Oxy II. 2051). 48, a long letter by a tax-collector of i/A.D., στατῆρας πορφύ[ρ]ας ἀγόρασον . . . ἐὰν εὕρῃς ἀγ[οἱραστὴν τοῦ μέρ[ους] τῆς οἰκίας. For ἀγοραστός, see also P Petr II. 2011. 5,8 (B.C, 252) τοῦ ἀγοραστοῦ = ‘‘(wheat) for sale,” and P Tebt I. 301! (A.p. 123) (= Se/ectrons, p. 78) ἀγοραστὴν παρὰ Θενπετεσούχον . . . οἰκίαν, “the house as purchased from Thenpetesuchus,” αὐ…
Read the full entry →ἀγοράζω (agorazō) — to buy.
ἀγοράζω [ᾰγ],
future άσω [LXX+5th c.BC+]: aorist ἠγόρασα[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἠγόρακα[Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle, aorist ἠγορασάμην[Refs 4th c.BC+]perfect ἠγόρασμαι (see. below):—passive, aorist ἠγοράσθην[Refs]: perfect ἠγόρασμαι[Refs 4th c.BC+]:—frequent the ἀγορά, αἱ γυναῖκες ἀ. καὶ καπηλεύουσι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; occupy the market-place, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. buy in the market, πωλεῖν ἀ.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; generally, buy, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; farm taxes or state-contracts, ὠνὴν ἀ.[Refs]:—middle, buy for oneself, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, διάτινος ἀ.[Refs 4th c.BC+]: perfect passive in middle sense, ἀντὶ τοῦ ἠγοράσθαι αὐτοῖς τὸν οἶνον[Refs]
ἀγοράζω
agorazo
from 58; properly, to go to market, i.e. (by implication) to purchase;
specially, to redeem:--buy, redeem.
see GREEK for 58
ἀγοράζω
v.
I buy
ἀγοράζω agorazō 30x
to buy; redeem, acquire by a ransom or price paid
ἀγοράζω (also in mid. sense); to be in the ἀγορά, frequent it, Hdt.: to occupy the market-place, Thuc.
to buy in the market, buy, purchase, Ar., Xen.; Mid. to buy for oneself, id. Xen., etc.
as a mark of idle fellows, to lounge in the ἀγορά, Thuc.; cf. ἀγοραῖος.
Verb-AAI-2S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · second person · singularaorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-AAI-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: second Number: Singular
31 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 18 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 30 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 14 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Ἐνστάσης δὲ τῆς ἡμέρας, καθʼ ἣν ἔμελλεν τὰ τέλη πιπράσκεσθαι τῶν πόλεων, ἠγόραζον οἱ τοῖς ἀξιώμασιν ἐν ταῖς πατρίσιν διαφέροντες.
γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἄρουραν α, ὧν αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ τῆς προκειμένης συνγραφῆς, ἣν ἠγόρασεν παρὰ Πετεαρσεμθέως τοῦ Πανεβχούνιος πρὸς χαλκοῦ τάλαντα β, τέλος Ασ, γίνονται χαλκοῦ δραχμαὶ Ασ.
παστοφορίου ἐντὸς τοῦ περιβόλου τοῦ ἐπιβάλλοντος αὐτῶι μέρους τετάρτου, ὧν αἱ γειτνίαι δεδηλῶνται, ὃν ἠγόρασεν παρὰ Νεχούτου τοῦ Σχώτου ἱερέως Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης χαλκοῦ Γ, τέλος τ. Παγκράτης.
τὸν μῦν καταβεβρωκέναι τὸν σπόρον. καλῶς ἡμῖν ὦδε, ἢ ἐν Διοσπόλει ἐὰν αἱρῆσθε, πυρὸν ἀγοράσαι ἥκετε. τὰ δʼ ἄλλα χαρίζοισθʼ ἑαυτῶν ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε. ἔρρωται Ὧρος καὶ Πετοσῖρις. ἔρρωσθε.
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-DSM — Article · dative · singular · masculinedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-DSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
θεός (theos) means 'God' or 'a god' and is used in both singular and plural forms. It refers to the supreme deity in monotheistic contexts, as well as to lesser deities in polytheistic settings. The New Testament frequently employs this term, notably in verses like Matthew 27:46 and Acts 19:37. Some lexicons note its use as a title for rulers or magistrates, reflecting its broader application in ancient texts.
θεός, -οῦ, ὁ, ἡ (Ac 19:37 only; v. M, Pr., 60, 244), late voc., θεέ (Mt 27:46; cf. De 3:24, al.),
[in LXX chiefly for אֱלֹהִים, also for אֵל and other cognate forms, יהוה, etc.;]
a god or deity, God.
In polytheistic sense, a god or deity: Ac 28:6, I Co 8:4, II Th 2:4, al.; pl., Ac. 14:11 19:26, Ga 4:8, al.
Of the one true God;
θεός, -οὔ, ὁ and ἡ, voc. θεέ, once in the N. T., Mt. xxvii. 46; besides in Deut. iii. 24; Judg. [xvi. 28;] xxi. 3; [2 S. vii. 25; Is. xxxviii. 20]; Sir. xxiii. 4; Sap. ix. 1; 3 Mace. vi. 3; 4 Mace. vi. 27; Act. Thom. 44 sq. 57; Eus. h. 6. 2, 23,16; [5, 20,7; vit. Const. 2,55, 1.59]; ef. W. §8, 2 ο.; [B. 12 (11)]; ({on the eight or more proposed derivations see Vaniéek p. 386, who follows Curtius (after Doderlein) p. 513 sqq. in connecting it with a root meaning to supplicate, implore; hence the implored ; per contra cf. Max Miiller, Chips ete. iv. 227 sq.; L. and 8. s. v. fin.]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 58, ΟΝ and m7; a god, a goddess; 1. a general appellation of deities or divinities: Acts xxviii. 6; 1 Co. viii. 4; 2 Th. ii. 4; once ἡ θεός, Acts xix. 37 G LT Tr WH; θεοῦ φωνὴ καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου, Acts xii. 22; ἄνθρωπος ὧν ποιεῖς σεαυτὸν θεόν, Jn. x. 33; plur., of the gods of the…
Read the full entry →θεός. For the application of the title θεός to the Ptolemaic kings it is sufficient to recall Brit. Mus. Inscrr. IV. 1 No. 906% (B.C. 284-273) where a votive offering is dedicated in honour of Πτολεμαίου τοῦ σωτῆρος καὶ θεοῦ, and the description of Ptolemy V. (Epiphanes) on the Rosetta stone—OG/S gol? (B.C. 196) ὑπάρχων θεὸς ἐκ θεοῦ Kal θεᾶς : cf. Deissmann LAE, p. 348 and the full discussion by E. Kornemann ‘‘ Zur Geschichte der antiken Herrscherkulte” in Beztrdge zur alten Geschichte [Klio] i., p. 51 ff. (Leipzig, 1902). The same practice is still more strikingly illustrated in the Imperial period, as when in an inscr. from the Fayum district, dated March 17th, B.c. 24, Augustus is described as θεὸς ἐκ θεοῦ (OG/S 6557), or as when a votive inscr. is addressed to Nero—daya0a(t) θεῶ(ι) (Cos 927): see Deissmann 7s. p. 349. With this may be compared the frequent use for Augustus of the…
Read the full entry →θεός (theos) — God.
θεός, ὁ,
Boeotian dialect θιός, Laconian dialect σιός (see. below), [Refs 5th c.AD+], Cretan dialect θιός [Refs], Doric dialect also θεύς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; vocative (only late) θεός, also θεέ [LXX+NT]; but classical in compound names, Ἀμφίθεε, Τιμόθεε:—God, the Deity, in general sense, both singular and plural (εἰ καὶ ἐπὶ θεοὺς καὶ ἔτι μᾶλλον ἐπὶ θεὸν ἁρμόζει μεταφέρειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; σὺν θ. εἰρημένον [Refs 5th c.BC+]: so in plural, σύν γε θεοῖσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐ θεῶν ἄτερ pi.[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑπὲρ θεόν against his will,[Refs 4th c.BC+]; θεῶν συνεθελόντων, βουλομένων, [Refs 5th c.BC+]bless you! good heavens! for heaven's sake! [Refs 8th c.BC+]: doubled in poets, θεὸν θεόν τις ἀγλαϊζέτω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θεοί (Cretan dialect θιοί) as an opening formula in Inscrr. (i.e. τύχην ἀγαθὴν διδοῖεν), [Refs].1, etc.: in Prose also with the Article, ὁ θ.…
Read the full entry →θεός
theos
of uncertain affinity; a deity, especially (with 3588) the supreme
Divinity; figuratively, a magistrate; by Hebraism, very:--X exceeding,
God, god(-ly, -ward).
see GREEK for 3588
θεός, οῦ, ὁ
n.f. & n.m.
God, a god
θεός theos 1x
a deity, Acts 7:43; 1 Cor. 8:5; an idol, Acts 7:40; God, the true God, Mt. 3:9, et al. freq.; God, possessed of true godhead, Jn. 1:1; Rom. 9:5; from the Hebrew, applied to potentates, Jn. 10:34, 35; τῷ θεῷ, an intensive term, from the Hebrew, exceedingly, Acts 7:20, and, perhaps, 2 Cor. 10:4
θεός θεός, ὁ, God, Hom., both in general sense, Θεὸς δώσει God will grant, and in particular sense, θεός τις a god; πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Hom.:—things are said to happen σὺν θεῷ, σύν γε θεοῖσιν by the will of God, id. Hom., etc.; οὐκ ἄνευ θεοῦ, Lat. non sine diis, Od.; οὐκ ἄνευθε θεοῦ Il.; οὐ θεῶν ἄτερ Pind.;— ἐκ θεόφι Il.;— ὑπὲρ θεόν against his will, id. Il.;— κατὰ θεόν τινα, Lat. divinitus, Eur.:—as an oath, πρὸς θεῶν by the gods, in God's name, Trag.; θεὸς ἴστω Soph., etc.
θεός as fem. for θεά, θέαινα, a goddess, Hom.; θήλεια θεός Il.; ἡ νερτέρα θ. Proserpine, Soph.; often in oaths, νὴ τὼ θεώ id. Soph.; ναὶ τὼ σιώ, with the Spartans, of Castor and Pollux, Xen.; with the Boeotians, of Amphion and Zethus, id.…
Read the full entry →Noun-DSM — Noun · dative · singular · masculinedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-DSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
god ('Elohim, 'El, [`Elyon], Shadday, Yahweh; Theos):
I. INTRODUCTION TO THE GENERAL IDEA
1. The Idea in Experience and in Thought
2. Definition of the Idea
3. The Knowledge of God
4. Ethnic Ideas of God
(1) Animism
(2) Fetishism
(3) Idolatry
(4) Polytheism
(5) Henotheism
(6) Pantheism
(7) Deism
(8) Semitic Monolatry
(9) Monotheism
II. THE IDEA OF GOD IN THE OLD TESTAMENT
1. The Course of Its Development
2. Forms of Its Manifestation
(1) The Face or Countenance of God
(2) The Voice and Word of God
(3) The Glory of God
(4) The Angel of God
(5) The Spirit of God
(6) The Name of God
(7) Occasional Forms
3. The Names of God
(1) Generic
(2) Attributive
(3) Yahweh
4. Pre-prophetic Conceptions of God
(1) Yahweh Alone Is the God of Israel
(a) His Early Worship
(b) Popular Religion
(c) Polytheistic Tendencies
(i) Coordination
(ii) Assimilation
(iii) Disintegration
(d) No Hebrew Goddesses
(e) Human Sacrifices
God
(A.S. and Dutch God; Dan. Gud; Ger. Gott), the name of the Divine Being. It is the rendering (1) of the Hebrew ’El, from a word meaning to be strong; (2) of ’Eloah_, plural _’Elohim. The singular form, Eloah, is used only in poetry. The plural form is more commonly used in all parts of the Bible, The Hebrew word Jehovah (q.v.), the only other word generally employed to denote the Supreme Being, is uniformly rendered in the Authorized Version by “LORD,” printed in small capitals. The existence of God is taken for granted in the Bible. There is nowhere any argument to prove it. He who disbelieves this truth is spoken of as one devoid of understanding (Ps. 14:1).
The arguments generally adduced by theologians in proof of the being of God are:
(1.) The a priori argument, which is the testimony afforded by reason.
(good). Throughout the Hebrew Scriptures two chief names are used for the one true divine Being--ELOHIM, commonly translated God in our version, and JEHOVAH, translated Lord . Elohim is the plural of Eloah (in Arabic Allah); it is often used in the short form EL (a word signifying strength , as in EL-SHADDAI, God Almighty, the name by which God was specially known to the patriarchs. (Genesis 17:1; 28:3; Exodus 6:3) The etymology is uncertain, but it is generally agreed that the primary idea is that of strength, power of effect , and that it properly describes God in that character in which he is exhibited to all men in his works, as the creator, sustainer and supreme governor of the world. The plural form of Elohim has given rise to much discussion. The fanciful idea that it…
This name, the derivation of which is uncertain, we give to that eternal, infinite, perfect, and incomprehensible Being, the Creator of all things, who preserves and governs all by his almighty power and wisdom, and is the only proper object of worship. The proper Hebrew name for God is JEHOVAH, which signifies He is. But the Jews, from a feeling of reverence, avoid pronouncing this name, substituting for it, wherever it occurs in the sacred test, the word ADONAI, Lord; except in the expression, ADONAI JEHOVAH, Lord Jehovah, for which they put, ADONAI ELOHIM, Lord God. This usage, which is not without an element of superstition, is very ancient, dating its origin some centuries before Christ; but there is no good ground for assuming its existence in the days of the inspired Old Testament writers. The proper word for God is ELOHIM, which is plural in its form, being thus used to signify…
1,342 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 14 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,311 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
15 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Counted over the 1,637 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Τινὲς γὰρ τὸν κόσμον μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν κοσμοποιὸν θαυμάσαντες τὸν μὲν ἀγένητόν τε καὶ ἀίδιον ἀπεφήναντο, τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ πολλὴν ἀπραξίαν ἀνάγνως κατεψεύσαντο, δέον ἔμπαλιν τοῦ μὲν τὰς δυνάμεις ὡς ποιητοῦ καὶ πατρὸς καταπλαγῆναι, τὸν δὲ μὴ πλέον ἀποσεμνῦναι…
ὡς πύργος, ὃν οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ἐφ' ὕβρει τοῦ θεοῦ ᾠκοδόμησαν, καὶ ὡς τὰς φωνὰς αὐτῶν μετέβαλε καὶ ὁ τόπος, ἐν ᾧ τοῦτο γέγονε, Βαβυλὼν ἐκλήθη.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
αὐτῷ μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς
1 βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ καὶ Ἀλεξάνδρου θεοῦ Φιλομήτορος καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεᾶς Φιλαδέλφου ἔτους ἑκκαιδεκάτου ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ
ἡμῖν Φιλόξενος ὁ ἀδελφὸς διʼ ὧν κεκόμικεν ἡμῖν Ὄρσης γραμμάτων περὶ τοῦ τὸν μέγιστον Θεὸν Σωτῆρα βασιλέα ἐπιβεβληκέναι εἰς Μέμφιν, Ἱέρακα δὲ προκεχειρίσθαι μετὰ δυνάμεων μυρίων ἐπὶ καταστολὴν τῆς
ἐγώ, gen, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς,
pers. pron.
I.
ἐγώ, gen. ἐμοῦ, enclitic pod; dat. ἐμοί, enclitic μοί; acc. ἐμέ, enclitic μέ; plur. ἡμεῖς, ete.; personal pronoun, J. 1. The nominatives ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, when joined to a verb, generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis, as Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (ἐγὼ pev... ὁ δέ); Mt. iii. 14 (ἐγὼ... ἔχω, καὶ σύν ; V. 22, 28, 39, and often; ἡμεῖς, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ἡμεῖς x. of Φαρισαῖοι, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them, as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; οἵ. B. §129, 12. ἰδοὺ ἐγώ, 1397, behold me, hereamT: Acts ix.10 (1S. iii. 8). ἐγώ, like 38, Jam: Jn. i. 23; Acts vii. 32, [ef. W.585 (544); B. 125 (109)]. 2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace. are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with prepositions: ἔμπροσθέν pov, Jn. i. 15; ὀπίσω…
Read the full entry →ἐγώ. Deissmann (ZAZ p. 134 ff.) has drawn attention to the parallels to the solemn use of the first personal pronoun in the Fourth Gospel that may be adduced from inscriptions and magical texts. Thus in an inscr. in honour of Isis from Ios, written in ii/iii A.p., the contents of which are preChristian, we find —Elows ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ τ[ύρανν]ος πάσης χόρας.. ἐγὼ νόμους ἀνθρώποις ἐθέμην . . ἐγώ εἰμι Kpdvov θυγάτηρ πρεσβυτάτη α΄. And similarly in the magical papyrus P Lond 4645 (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 69) ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ἀκέφαλος δαίμων . . ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἀλήθεια ὁ μεισῶν ἀδικήματα γείνεσθαι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ α΄. With the construction of the phrase τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ; in Jn 24 we may compare BGU IV. 1141°8 (n.c. 14) ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ διαστολὰς μηδὲν αὐτῶι καὶ ἐκείνωι εἶναι : for its meaning see Ε΄. C. Burkitt in 77:5 xiii. p- 594f., where it is rendered, ‘‘ What have I and thou to do with that ?” On the difficult…
Read the full entry →μέ (me) — me.
ἐγώ,
I: pronoun of the first person:—Epic dialect mostly ἐγών before vowels (so in Doric dialect, before consonants, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἱών [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:— strengthened ἔγωγε, I at least, for my part, indeed, for myself (more frequently in Attic dialect than in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Doric dialect ἐγώνγα [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Boeotian dialect ἱώνγα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἱώνει [Refs]; ἰώγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Laconian dialect and Tarentum dialect ἐγώνη, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
II. oblique cases from a different root, genitive ἐμοῦ, enclitic μο; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μευ, also ἐμέθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἔμεθεν [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἐμέος, ἐμεῦς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἐμοῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+] — _dative_ ἐμοί, enclitic μοι (which may be compared with Sanskrit…
ἐγώ
me
a shorter (and probably originally) from of 1691; me:--I, me, my.
see GREEK for 1691
ἐγώ egō 2x
I, gen., ἐμοῦ [μου], dat., ἐμοί [μοι], acc., ἐμέ [με]
Pron-1AP — Personal pronoun · first person · accusative · pluralaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.
P-1AP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: first Case: Accusative Number: Plural
US, pronoun objective case of we.
Give us this day our daily bread.
Us , pron. [OE. us, AS. s; akin to OFries. & OS. s, D. ons, G. uns, Icel. & Sw. oss, Dan. os, Goth. uns, L. nos we, us, Gr. we, Skr. nas us. . Cf. Nostrum, Our.] The persons speaking, regarded as an object; ourselves; — the objective case of we. See We. “Tell us a tale.” Chaucer.
Give us this day our daily bread. Matt. vi. 11.
Us, pron. oblique case of we
2,029 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 27 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.
ἐν,
prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).
Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…
Read the full entry →ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…
Read the full entry →ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…
Read the full entry →ἐν (en) — in/on/among.
ἐν,
poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]
__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.
__A WITH DAT.
__A.I OF PLACE,
__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…
ἐν
en
a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or
state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or
constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519
and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +
almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+
all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,
-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,
one, X quickly,
X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),
through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,
with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same
import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate
direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)
preposition.
see GREEK for 1519
see GREEK for 1537
ἐν
Prep.
in, on, among
ἐν en 2x
followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of,
ἐν
e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.
Lat. in.
PREP. WITH DAT.:
OF PLACE
in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.
in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.
in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.
in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.
in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
In the sense of "against" which survives only in dialectal English (compare Wright, Dialect Dict., I, 470, for examples) is the King James Version rendering of the dative emauto of 1Co 4:4 (the American Standard Revised Version renders this "against"). In classical Greek the same idiom sunoida with dative = "be conscious" or "be cognizant of" a thing.
By
In the expression “by myself” (A.V., 1 Cor. 4:4), means, as rendered in the Revised Version, “against myself.”
2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-DSN — Article · dative · singular · neuterdative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
T-DSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word αἷμα (i.e., *haima*) means 'blood' and encompasses various meanings, including literal blood of humans and animals, bloodshed, and metaphorical uses related to kinship and origin. It appears in numerous New Testament passages, notably in contexts of sacrifice and the blood of Christ. Some entries highlight its use in phrases indicating human nature contrasted with divine, while others note its association with color and bloodshed.
αἷμα, ατος, τό,
[in LXX for דָּם;]
blood.
In the ordinary sense: Mk 5:25, Lk 8:43, 44 22:44, Jo 19:34, Ac 15:20, 29 21:25, Re 8:7, 8 11:6 16:3, 4, 6 19:13.
In special senses:
of generation, origin, kinship (cl.): Jo 1:13 (v. MM, VGT, s.v.);
as in OT (AR on Eph, 6:12), in the phrase σάρξ καὶ αἷ. (αἷ. κ. σ.), to indicate human nature as opp. to God and created spirits: Mt 16:17, I Co 15:50, Ga 1:16, Eph 6:12,
αἷμα, -ros, τό, blood, whether of men or of animals; 1. a. simply and generally: Jn. xix. 34; Rev. viii. 7 56. ; xi. 6; xvi. 3 sq. 6” (on which passages cf. Ex. vii. 20 544.) ; xix. 13; ῥύσις αἵματος, Mk. v. 25, [(πηγὴ αἷμ. 29)]; Lk. viii. 43 sq.; θρόμβοι αἵματος, Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]. So also in passages where the eating of blood (and of bloody flesh) is forbidden, Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; cf. Lev. iii. 17; vil. 16 (26); xvii. 10; see Knobel on Ley. vii. 26 sq.; [Kalisch on Lev., Preliminary Essay ὃ 1]; Riickert, Abendmahl, p. 94. ὍὌ. As it was anciently believed that the blood is the seat of the life (Lev. xvii. 11; [cf. Delitzsch, Bibl. Psychol. pp. 238-247 (Eng. trans. p. 281 sqq-)]), the phrase σὰρξ x. αἷμα (D7) 3, a common phrase in Rabbinical writers), or in inverse order αἷμα x. σάρξ, denotes man’s living body compounded of flesh and blood, 1 Co. xv. 50…
Read the full entry →αἷμα. An interesting parallel to the common Biblical phrase αἷμα ἐκχέω, especially as it appears in Deut 19’ καὶ οὐκ ἐκχυθήσεται αἷμα ἀναίτιον, is afforded by an inscription found on a tombstone at Rheneia, containing a Jewish ‘‘prayer for vengeance,” Sy// 816°* (i/A.D.) ἐγχέαντας αὐτῆς τὸ ἀναίτιον αἷμα ἀδίκως : see the full discussion in Deissmann 2.42 p. 4231. For the use of αἷμα, as in Jn 11", cf. P Lips I. 28! (a.p. 381) mp[d]s τὸ εἶναί cov vilo]y γνήσιον καὶ πρωτότοκον ὡς ἐξ ἰδίου αἵματος γεννηθέντα σοι. In P Leid C (verso) 119 (p. 118 —B.c. 161) two men appear in a dream saying Πτολεμαῖος, λαβὲ to[is] χαλκοὺς τοῦ αἵματος : they count out a purseful and say to one of the Twins εἰδοὺ τοὺς χαλκοὺς Tod αἵματος. Leemans quotes an opinion that this meant the price of a victim, and compares Mt 27% In the sense of murder or blood-guiltiness it finds modern support in the Pontic dialect…
Read the full entry →αἷμα (ahima) — blood.
αἷμα, ατος, τό,
blood, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: in plural, streams of blood, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. of anything like blood, Βακχίου[LXX+5th c.BC+]
2. b dye obtained from ἄγχουσα, alkanet, [Refs]
3. with collateral meaning of spirit, courage, οὐκ ἔχων αἷμα pale, spiritless [Refs 4th c.BC+]
II. bloodshcd, murder, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅμαιμον αἷ. a kinsman's murder, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; εἴργασται μητρῷον αἷ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἶ. πράττειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἷμα τραγοκτόνον shedding of goat's blood, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐφ᾽ αἵματι φεύγειν to avoid trial for murder by going into exile, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: plural in this sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἵματασύγγονα brothers' corpses, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —concrete, νεακόνητον αἷ. keen-edged death, i. e. a sword, [Refs 5th…
αἷμα
haima
of uncertain derivation; blood, literally (of men or animals),
figuratively (the juice of grapes) or specially (the atoning blood of
Christ); by implication, bloodshed, also kindred:--blood.
αἷμα, ατος, τό
n.n.
blood
αἱμα haima 97x
blood; of the color of blood; bloodshed; blood-guiltiness; natural descent
αἷμα blood, Hom., etc.; in pl. streams of blood, Trag.
bloodshed, murder, Aesch., etc.: —ἐφ᾽ αἵματι φεύγειν to avoid trial for murder by going into exile, Dem.; so, αἷμα φεύγειν Eur.
like Lat. sanguis, blood-relationship, kin, Soph., Hom., etc.; ὁ πρὸς αἵματος one of the blood or race, Soph.; μητρὸς τῆς ἐμῆς ἐν αἵματι akin to her by blood, Aesch.
Deriv. uncertain.
Noun-DSN — Noun · dative · singular · neuterdative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
N-DSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
blud (dam, probably from 'adham "to be red"; haima): Used in the Old Testament to designate the life principle in either animal or vegetable, as the blood of man or the juice of the grape (Le 17:11, et al.); in the New Testament for the blood of an animal, the atoning blood of Christ, and in both Old Testament and New Testament in a figurative sense for bloodshed or murder (Ge 37:26; Ho 4:2; Re 16:6).
1. Primitive Ideas:
Although the real function of the blood in the human system was not fully known until the fact of its circulation was established by William Harvey in 1615, nevertheless from the earliest times a singular mystery has been attached to it by all peoples. Blood…
Blood
(1.) As food, prohibited in Gen. 9:4, where the use of animal food is first allowed. Comp. Deut. 12:23; Lev. 3:17; 7:26; 17:10-14. The injunction to abstain from blood is renewed in the decree of the council of Jerusalem (Acts 15:29). It has been held by some, and we think correctly, that this law of prohibition was only ceremonial and temporary; while others regard it as still binding on all. Blood was eaten by the Israelites after the battle of Gilboa (1 Sam. 14:32-34).
(2.) The blood of sacrifices was caught by the priest in a basin, and then sprinkled seven times on the altar; that of the passover on the…
To blood is ascribed in Scripture the mysterious sacredness which belongs to life, and God reserved it to himself when allowing man the dominion over and the use of the lower animals for food. Thus reserved, it acquires a double power: (1) that of sacrificial atonement; and (2) that of becoming a curse when wantonly shed, unless duly expiated. (Genesis 9:4; Leviticus 7:26; 17:11-13)
The life of all animals was regarded as especially in the blood, which was a sacred and essential part of the sacrifices offered to God, Heb 9:22. It was solemnly sprinkled upon the altar and the mercy seat, "for it is the blood that maketh atonement for the soul," Le 17:1-16 the life of the victim for the life of the sinner. It was therefore most sacredly associated with the blood of the Lamb of God which "cleanseth us from all sin," Eph 1:7 1Jo 1:7. Hence the strict prohibition renewed in Ac 15:29. In direct opposition to this are the heathen customs of drinking the blood of animals and even of men- of eating raw flesh, with the blood, and even fresh cut from the living…
100 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 97 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 223 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
εἰπάτω γάρ, τίς τέ ἐστι καὶ ποταπός, πνεῦμα ἢ αἷμα ἢ πῦρ ἢ ἀὴρ ἢ ἕτερόν τι [σῶμα], ἢ τοσοῦτόν γε ὅτι σῶμά ἐστιν ἢ πάλιν ἀσώματον.
δεσπότας γὰρ ἁπάντων ὑμᾶς εἶναι πεποίηκα τῶν τε χερσαίων καὶ νηκτῶν καὶ ὅσα τὴν μετάρσιον αἰώραν ἔχει καὶ φοράν, χωρὶς αἵματος·
πλήρης εἰμὶ ὁλοκαυτωμάτων, καὶ στέαρ ἀρνῶν καὶ αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων οὐ βούλομαι, οὐδ̓ ἂν ἔρχησθε ὀφθῆναί μοι, τίς γὰρ ἐξεζήτησεν ταῦτα ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν ὑμῶν;
τῆι ε τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος μηνὸς ἐφοδεύων … τὰ περὶ τὴν κώμην πεδία εὗρον ἔκχυσιν αἵματος , πυνθάνομαι δὲ τῶν ἐκ τῆς κώμης Θεόδοτον Δωσιθέου ἐξελθόντα ὡς ἐπὶ ταῦτα μηκέτʼ
τοῦ ὑπηρέτου εὗρον ἐπὶ τῷ μέσῳ δακτύλῳ τραῦμα , ὃ καὶ θεραπεύω, καὶ συνδρομὴν αἵματος ἐπὶ τῷ μαστῷ καὶ ἐξεμοῦσαν καὶ πυρέττουσαν. διὸ προσφωνῶ. ἔτους ιε Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Δομιτιανοῦ
θύραν ἐπισφραγεῖσαν ἀνεωγμένην … ων … τῶν χοίρων ἓξ χοίραν μίαν … α τὸ αἷμα ἀπέκειτο
σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.
σύ,
pron. of 2nd pers.,
thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also
Read the full entry →σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…
Read the full entry →σύ (su) — you.
σύ [ῠ],
thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…
Read the full entry →σύ
su
the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See
also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.
see GREEK for 4675
see GREEK for 4571
see GREEK for 4671
see GREEK for 5209
see GREEK for 5210
see GREEK for 5213
see GREEK for 5216
σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ
Pers.pr.
you
σύ sy 2x
you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6
Pron-2GS — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · singulargenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.
P-2GS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Singular
3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.
παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν
η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ
παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .
The Greek word ἐκ (transliterated as ek) is a preposition that means 'from' or 'out of,' governing the genitive case. It indicates origin, separation, or motion away from a place, time, or cause. In the New Testament, it is used to denote various relationships, such as source or distinction, and appears in contexts like John 6:31 and Matthew 1:3. Different lexicons highlight its versatility in both literal and metaphorical senses.
ἐκ (ἐξ),
prep. c. gen.,
from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492).
ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ,
prep. c. gen.,
of motion outwards, separation from (opp. to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from.
Of Place,
ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, a preposition governing the genitive. It denotes as well exit or emission out of, as separation from, something with which there has been close connection ; opp. to the prepositions εἰς into and ἐν in: from out of, out from, forth from, from, (Lat. e, ex), [ οἵ. W. 364, 366 (343) sq.; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used I. of Pace, and 1. univ. of the place from which; from a surrounding or enclosing place, from the interior of: ἄρτος, ἄγγελος, φῶς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Jn. vi. 81 sq.; Acts ix. 3 [here RG ἀπό]; Gal. 1. 8; ἀνατολή, δύναμις ἐξ ὕψους, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; esp. after verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, freeing, removing, releasing, etc. : ἥκειν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας eis τ. Γαλιλαίαν, Jn. iv. 47; ἐξέρχεσθαι ἔκ τινος out of the body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25; v. 8 [here L mrg. ἀπό]; vii. 29; of power emanating from the body, Mk. v. 30 [cf. B. 301 (258)…
Read the full entry →ἐκ 190 passages as P Tebt I. 23" (c. B.C. 119 or 114) οὐκ ὀρθῶς κρίνομεν πέπρακταί σοι μὴ ἐκ τῆς ἡμῶν προεδρίας πεφροντικέναι ἀπροσδέητον ἑτέρων γενέσθαι, ‘I consider that you have acted badly in not having been careful that he should be independent of others owing to my superior rank ”’ (Edd. ), 24. 248° (B.c. 117) ἔκ τε τῆς πλείστης προσεδρείας, ‘on account of the prolonged attendance ’’ (Edd.), and P Fay 12} (c. B.C. 103) ἐκ κοινολογ[ς(]α[ς] τ[ἢ]ς συνσταθείσης πρὸς αὐτούς, ‘‘as the result of the colloquy which took place between τ᾿ (Edd.). From this it is an easy transition to the meaning ‘‘ according to”’ or “in accordance with,’’ as in the common legal phrase καθάπερ ἐγ δίκης, ‘‘as if in accordance with a legal decision,’’ z. δ. ‘‘as if a formal decree of the court had been obtained,’’ as in P Eleph 1132 (B.C. 311-0) (= Selections, p- 3), P Ryl 11. 15435 (a.p. 66): cf. P Petr III.…
Read the full entry →ἐκ (ek) — out from.
ἐκ,
before a vowel ἐξ, also
__A ἐξ τῳ ϝοίκῳ [Refs] and less frequently ; ἐγ- in Inscrr. before β γ δ λ μ ; Cretan dialect and Boeotian dialect ἐς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἐχ frequently in Attic dialect Inscrr. before χ φ θ (and in early Inscrr. before ς, [Refs]:—preposition governing GEN. only (except in [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—radical sense, from out of, frequently also simply, from.
__A.I OF PLACE, the most frequently usage, variously modified:
__A.I.1 of Motion, out of, forth from, ἐκ Πύλου ἐλθὼν τηλόθεν ἐξ ἀπίης γαίης [Refs 8th c.BC+] to strike with a spear in the hand, opposed to ἀντιτοξεύειν or ἀκοντίζειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκ χρυσῶν φιαλῶν πίνειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]
ἐκ
ek
or ex ex
a primary preposition denoting origin (the point whence action or
motion proceeds), from, out (of place, time, or cause; literal or
figurative; direct or remote):--after, among, X are, at,
betwixt(-yond), by (the means of), exceedingly, (+ abundantly above),
for(- th), from (among, forth, up), + grudgingly, + heartily, X
heavenly, X hereby, + very highly, in, ...ly, (because, by reason) of,
off (from), on, out among (from, of), over, since, X thenceforth,
through,
X unto, X vehemently, with(-out). Often used in composition,
with the same general import; often of completion.
ἐκ, ἐξ
Prep.
from out, out from among, from
ἐκ ek 915x
ἐχ before vowels, with genitive, from, out of, a place, Mt. 2:15; 3:17; of, from, out of, denoting origin or source, Mt. 1:3; 21:19; of, from some material, Mt. 3:9; Rom. 9:21; of, from, among, partitively, Mt. 6:27; 21:31; Mk. 9:17; from, denoting cause, Rev. 8:11; 17:6; means or instrument, Mt. 12:33, 37; by, through, denoting the author or efficient cause, Mt. 1:18; Read the full entry →
ἐκ
ἐξ before a vowel, ἐγ before β γ δ λ μ prep. governing GEN. only, Lat. e, exRadical sense, from out of, opp. to εἰς:
out of, from. c. gen.
OF PLACE:
of Motion, out of, forth from, Hom., etc.: ἐκ θυμοῦ φίλεον I loved her from my heart, with all my heart, Il.
to denote change from one place or condition to another, κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ one evil from (or after) another, id. Il.; λόγον ἐκ λόγου λέγειν Dem.
to express distinction from a number, ἐκ πόλεων πίσυρες four out of many, Il.
of Position, like ἔξω, outside of, beyond, ἐκ βελέων out of shot, id. Il.; ἐκ καπνοῦ out of the smoke, Od.
with Verbs of Rest, ἐκ ποταμοῦ χρόα νίζετο washed his body with water from the river, id. Od.:—with Verbs signifying to hang or fasten, ἐκ πασσαλόφι κρέμασεν φόρμιγγα he hung his lyre from (i. e. on) the peg, id.…
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
ov:
(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.
OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]
1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.
I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.
For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.
It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.
Lamentations 3:1.
The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.
Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.
That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.
Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…
933 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 26 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
The Greek word πᾶς (i.e., *pas*) means 'all' or 'every' and appears in various forms, including masculine, feminine, and neuter. It is used in the New Testament to denote totality, as in 'all things' or 'every kind,' and can function as an adjective or pronoun. Notably, it can also imply 'the whole' when used with definite articles, as seen in verses like Matthew 28:18.
πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, gen., παντός, πάσης, παντός,
[in LXX chiefly for כֹּל;]
all, every.
As adj.,
πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, en. παντός, πάσης, παντός, [dat. plur. Lchm. πᾶσι ten times, -σιν seventy-two times; Tdf. -σι five times (see Proleg. p. 98 sq.), -ow seventy-seven times; Treg. -ow eighty-two times; WH -ox fourteen times, -ow sixty-eight times; see N, v (ἐφελκυστικόν)], Hebr. 75, [fr. Hom. down], all, every; it is used I. adjectively, and 1. with anarthrous nouns; a. any, every one (86. of the class denoted by the noun annexed to mas); with the Singular: as πᾶν δένδρον, Mt. iii. 10; πᾶσα θυσία, Mk. ix. 49 [T WH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br. the cl.]; add, Mt. v.11; xv. 13; Lk. iv. 37; Jn.ii. 10; xv.2; Acts ii.43; v.42; Ro. xiv. 11; 1 Co. iv. 17; Rev. xviii. 17, and very often; πᾶσα ψυχὴ ἀνθρώπου, Ro. ii. 9 (πᾶσα ἀνθρ. ψυχή, Plat. Phaedr. p- 249e.); πᾶσα συνείδησις ἀνθρώπων, 2 Co. iv. 2; mas λεγόμενος θεός, 2 Th. ii. 4; πᾶς ἅγιος ἐν Χριστῷ, Phil. iv. 21sqq. with the Plural, all or any that are…
Read the full entry →παῖς. In Gnomon 41 (¢. A.D. 150) it is laid down—éav Αἰγύπτιος ἐκ κοπρίας [ἀν]έληται παῖδα καὶ τοῦτον υἱοποιήσηται, μετὰ θάνατον τεταρτολο[ γεῖτ]αι, ““1Γ an Egyptian shall take up a child from the dungheap, and adopt him as a son, he shall be mulcted after his death to the extent of one fourth of his property.” For παῖς applied to a female child see P Strass I. 41° (A.D. 250) ἐκδικῆσαι τὰ τῆς παιδός, and P Oxy 1 5215 (A.D. 325) εΠδαμὲν τὴν παῖδα ἔχουσαν κατὰ τῶν εἰσχίων ἀμυχὰς μετὰ πελιωμάτων (see 76. II. p. 319), ““νγῈ saw that the girl had wounds on her hips with livid spots”: cf. Lk 8° (for voc. of address see Pro/eg. pp. 70, 235). The word is commonly applied to slaves, as in Lk 77 a/., e.g. P Lille 27 (iii/B.c.), where 11 male slaves are enumerated under the heading παῖδες, then 2 female slaves, and then again 3 male slaves: cf. P Strass I. 405 (a. p. 569) Κολλοῦθος Βίκτορος…
Read the full entry →πᾶς (pas) — all.
πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν,
__AAeolic dialect παῖς, παῖσα [Refs 7th c.BC+] feminine πάνσα [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Delph. πάντεσσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also Locrian dialect πάντεσιν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πάντοις [Refs 2nd c.BC+] as accusative masculine in [LXX+7th c.BC+], etc. (but in compounds sometimes long in Attic dialect, [Refs].]—Coll. pronoun, when used of a number, all; when of one only, the whole; of the several persons in a number, every.
__A.I in plural, all, πάντες τε θεοὶ πᾶσαί τε θέαιναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πάντες ὅσοι.. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πάντας ᾧ ἂνπεριτυγχάνῃ, for ὅσοις ἄν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with the Article, see.below [Refs 5th c.BC+]
πᾶς
pas
including all the forms of declension; apparently a primary word; all,
any, every, the whole:--all (manner of, means), alway(-s), any (one),
X daily, + ever, every (one, way), as many as, + no(-thing), X
thoroughly, whatsoever, whole, whosoever.
πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν
Adj
all, the whole, every kind of
πᾶς pas 1x
all; in the sg. the whole, entire, usually when the substantive has the article, Mt. 6:29; 8:32; Acts 19:26; every, only with an anarthrous subst., Mt. 3:10; 4:4; pl. all, Mt. 1:17, et al. freq.; πάντα, in all respects, Acts 20:35; 1 Cor. 9:25; 10:33; 11:2; by a Hebraism, a negative with πᾶς is sometimes equivalent to οὐδείς or μηδείς, Mt. 24:22; Lk. 1:37; Acts 10:14; Read the full entry →
Adj-GSF — Adjective · genitive · singular · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
A-GSF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
1,264 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 28 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,242 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
27 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
καὶ γὰρ πατὴρ ἐκγόνων καὶ δημιουργὸς τῶν δημιουργηθέντων στοχάζεται τῆς διαμονῆς καὶ ὅσα μὲν ἐπιζήμια καὶ βλαβερὰ μηχανῇ πάσῃ διωθεῖται, τὰ δὲ ὅσα ὠφέλιμα καὶ λυσιτελῆ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον ἐκπορίζειν ἐπιποθεῖ·
ὡς οἱ Νώχου ἔγγονοι πᾶσαν τὴν οἰκουμένην ἐπῴκησαν.
πεφανέρωκεν γὰρ ἡμῖν διὰ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, ὅτι οὕτε θυσιῶν οὔτε ὁλοκαυτωμάτων οὔτε προσφορῶν χρῄζει, λέγων ὅτε μέν:
γῆ Σενπελαίας, βορρᾶ γῆ Πανᾶτος ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς Ἀραμείους, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντων πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πανοβχούνιος ὡς ἐτῶν μ χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δύο . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς
ἐτῶν λ χαλκοῦ δραχμῶν τρισχιλίων . προπωληταὶ καὶ βεβαιωταὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Νεχούτης καὶ ὁ σὺν αὐτῷ οἱ ἀποδόμενοι, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ
χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας καὶ διακοσίας . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πανοβχοῦνις ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Εὔνους ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.
φυλή (phulē) refers to a tribe or clan, often associated with kinship or local habitation. It encompasses the twelve tribes of Israel, as well as broader groups of people and nations. The New Testament uses it in contexts relating to the tribes of Israel (e.g., Matthew 19:28) and the nations of the earth. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meaning.
φυλή, ῆς, ἡ
[in LXX chiefly for; מַטֶּה, also for שֵׁבֶט, מִשְׁפָּחָה, etc. ;]
a body of men united by kinship or habitation, a clan or tribe: of the tribes of Israel, Mt 19:28, Lk 2:36 22:30, Ac 13:21, Ro 11:1, Phl 3:5, He 7:13, 14, Ja 1:1, Re 5:5 7:4-8 21:12; of the tribes of the earth, the peoples and nations, Mt 24:30, Re 1:7 5:9 7:9 11:9 13:7 14:6.†
φυλή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. φύω), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down ; aL a tribe; in the N.T. all the persons descended from one of the twelve sons of the patriarch Jacob (Sept. for 792 and viv; also for NMSwWN, see πατριά, 2): Heb. vii. 13 sq-; with the addition of the genitives ᾿Ασήρ, Βενιαμίν, ete., Lk. ii. 36; Acts xiii. 21; Ro. χὶ. 1 ; Phil. iii. 5; Rev. νυ. 5; vii. 5-8; δώδεκα φ. τοῦ Ἰσραήλ, Mt. xix. 28; Lk. xxii. 30; Jas.i. 1; Rev. xxi. 12; [πᾶσα φυλὴ υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ, Rev. vii. 4]. 2. a race, nation, people: Mt. xxiv. 30; Rev. [i. 7]; v.9; vii. 9; [xi.9]; xiii. 7; xiv. 6.
φυλή, “‘a tribe,” especially one of the twelve tribes of Israel (Mt τοῦ a/.), and extended by analogy to the tribes of the earth (Mt 24%° a/.). For the priestly tribes in Egypt, cf. P Tebt II. 2998 (c. A.D. 50), where a certain Psoiphis, τῶν ἀ[πὸ THs κώ]μης πέμπτη[ς φυλῆς] ἱερέος (1. ἱερέως) τῶν ἐν [τῇ κώμῃ] θεῶν, ““ priest of the fifth tribe of the gods at the village,” asks that the birth of a son be registered, P Kyl Il. 179° (A.D. 127) Πακῦσις . . . ἱερεὺς πρώτης φυλῆς Σοκνοπαίου θεοῦ μεγάλου, and similarly %*7, See further Otto Priester i. p. 23 ff. In Claudius’s address to the Alexandrines P Lond 19124! (A.D. 41) a φυλὴ Κλαυδιανά, not known elsewhere, is mentioned : see the editor’s note, where reference is made to Schubart Archiv v. p. 94f. for the Alexandrian tribenames of the Roman period. Cf. also Preisigke Fachworter 5.U.…
Read the full entry →φυλή (phulē) — tribe.
φῡλή, ἡ,
(φύω) properly, like{φῦλον}, a race, tribe; but accusative to [Refs 4th c.BC+] a union formed in an organized community (whether πόλις or ἔθνος): hence, tribe, i.e.
I. a body of men united
I.1. by supposed ties of blood and descent, clan, such as the three Dorian tribes, Rhetra cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the four Ionic tribes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the Laconian, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the old Roman, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; of the Persian, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the Jewish, [LXX] (but also of subdivisions of the tribe (σκῆπτρον),[LXX+NT]
I.2. by local habitation, such as the ten local tribes at Athens formed by Cleisthenes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or those formed by Servius at Rome, φ. τοπικαί, opposed to γενικαί, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
I.3. subdivision of the priests in each Egyptian temple, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]
φυλή
phule
from 5453 (compare 5444); an offshoot, i.e. race or clan:--kindred,
tribe.
see GREEK for 5453
see GREEK for 5444
φυλή, ῆς, ἡ
n.f.
a tribe, race
φυλή φυ_λή, ἡ, φύω like φῦλον, a race or tribe of men, κατὰ φυλάς Xen.
a body of men united by ties of blood and descent, a clan, such as those among the Dorians (φ. γενική), Pind.; of the four old Attic Tribes, Hdt., Eur.; of the Jewish, NTest.
a tribe connected by local habitation, like our hundred or county, such as the ten local tribes at Athens formed by Cleisthenes (φ. τοπική), Hdt., etc.—The subdivisions of the φυλαὶ γενικαί were φρατρίαι, those of the φυλαὶ τοπικαί were δῆμοι.
the contingent of soldiers furnished by a tribe, Hdt., Thuc., etc.:—later, a brigade of cavalry, Xen.; cf. φύλαρχος II.
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
trib (in the Old Testament always for matteh, 183 times, or shebhet, 145 times, also spelled shebhet; Aramaic shebhat (Ezr 6:17)): Both words mean "staff," and perhaps "company led by chief with staff" (OHL, 641) is the origin of the meaning "tribe." In the Apocrypha and New Testament always for phule, from phuo, "beget," with dodekaphulon, "twelve tribes," in Ac 26:7. Of the two Hebrew words, shebhet appears to be considerably the older, and is used in Ps 74:2; Jer 10:16; 51:19 of the whole people of Israel, and in Nu 4:18; Jud 20:12 (Revised Version margin);
Tribe
A collection of families descending from one ancestor. The “twelve tribes” of the Hebrews were the twelve collections of families which sprang from the sons of Jacob. In Matt. 24:30 the word has a wider significance. The tribes of Israel are referred to as types of the spiritual family of God (Rev. 7). (See ISRAEL, KINGDOM OF; JUDAH, KINGDOM OF.)
Jacob having twelve sons, who were heads of so many families, which together formed a great nation, each of these families was called a tribe. But this patriarch on his death-bed adopted Ephraim and Manasseh, the two sons of Joseph, and would have them also to constitute two tribes in Israel, Ge 48:5. Instead of twelve tribes, there were now thirteen, that of Joseph being two. However, in the distribution of lands by Joshua under the order of God, they reckoned but twelve tribes and made but twelve lots; of the tribe of Levi, being appointed to the sacred service, had no share in the distribution of the land, but received certain cities to dwell in, with the first-fruits, tithes, and oblations of the people. Each tribe had its own leaders and tribunals; and the whole twelve, in their early history, constituted a republic somewhat…
31 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 31 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 185 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„Δὰν κρινεῖ τὸν ἑαυτοῦ λαόν, ὡσεὶ καὶ μία φυλὴ Ἰσραήλ, καὶ γενέσθω Δὰν ὄφις ἐφ’ ὁδοῦ, ἐγκαθήμενος ἐπὶ τρίβου, δάκνων πτέρναν ἵππου, καὶ πεσεῖται ὁ ἱππεὺς εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω, τὴν σωτηρίαν περιμένων κυρίου“ (Gen.
εἰσὶ δὲ οὗτοι, οἳ τὸ τῶν Ἀράβων ἔθνος καὶ τὰς φυλὰς ἀπʼ αὐτῶν καλοῦσι διά τε τὴν ἀρετὴν αὐτῶν καὶ τὸ Ἁβράμου ἀξίωμα.
οἱ ῥαντίζοντες παῖδες οἱ εὐαγγελισάμενοι ἡμῖν τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ τὸν ἁγνισμὸν τῆς καρδίας, οἷς ἔδωκεν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τὴν ἐξουσίαν ʽοὖσιν δεκάδυο εἰς μαρτύριον τῶν φυλῶν ὅτι δεκάδυο φυλαὶ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ̓, εἰς τὸ κηρύσσειν.
τῆς Ἡρακλείδου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοείτου νομοῦ. ὁμολογεῖ Πακῦσις Στοτοήτεως πρεσβυτέρου τοῦ Πανεφρίμεως ἱερεὺς πρώτης φυλῆς Σοκνοπαίου θεοῦ μεγάλου μεγάλου ὡς ἐτῶν μα οὐλὴ βραχίωνι ἀριστερῶι τῷ ἑαυτοῦ ὁμοπατρίωι καὶ
κωμογραμματεῖ Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου παρὰ Πανεφρέμμεως Ἀγχώφεως πρεσβυτέρου Πανεφρέμμεως μητρὸς Στοτοήτεως τῆς Ὥρου ἱερέως τρίτης φυλῆς ἀπὸ κώμης Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου. ἀπογράφομαι ἐμαυτόν τε καὶ τοὺς ἐμοὺς εἰς τὴν τοῦ διεληλυθότος
τῆς Ἡρακλείδου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοείτου νομοῦ. ὁμολογεῖ Στοτοῆτις πρεσβύτερος Στοτοήτεως τοῦ Στοτοήτεως ἱερεὺς τετάρτης φυλῆς Σοκνοπαίου θεοῦ μεγάλου ὡς ἐτῶν ξδ οὐλὴ μετόπῳ μέσῳ Ἐρειεῦτι Πανεφρέμμεως τοῦ Στοτοήτεως ἱερείᾳ
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
γλῶσσα refers primarily to the tongue as the organ of speech, but it also denotes language and, in some contexts, a group of people defined by their language. The New Testament uses it in various ways, including references to speaking in tongues (Acts 2:11) and the metaphorical use of the tongue in discussions of speech and communication. Notably, it appears in contexts related to spiritual gifts and the expression of praise.
γλῶσσα, -ns, ἡ, [fr. Hom. down], the tongue ; 1. the tongue, a member of the body, the organ of speech: Mk. vii. 88, 35; Lk. i. 64; xvi. 24; 1 Co. xiv. 9; Jas. i. 26; iii. 5, 6, 8; 1 Pet. iii 10; 1 Jn. iii. 18; [Rev. xvi. 10]. By a poetical and rhetorical usage, esp. Hebraistic, that member of the body which is chiefly engaged in some act has ascribed to it what belongs to the man; the tongue is so used in Acts ii. 26 (Πγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά pov); Ro. iii. 13; xiv.11; Phil.ii. 11 (the tongue of every man) ; of the little tongue-like flames symbolizing the gift of foreign tongues, in Acts ii. 3. 2. a tongue, i. 6. the language used by a particular people in distinction from that of other nations: Acts ii. 11; hencein later Jewish usage (Is. Ixvi. 18; Dan. iii. 4; v. 19 Theod.; vi. 25; vii. 14 Theod.; Jud. iii. 8) joined with φυλή, λαός, ἔθνος, it serves to designate people of various…
Read the full entry →γλῶσσα. Most of the occurrences of this noun, which retains both form and meaning in MGr, need no particular comment. P Oxy I. 138 (A.D. 183 or 215) saefe, the monthly meat bill of a cook, tells us that ‘*‘tongue”’ was a favourite article of diet ; so also the numerous passages in inscrr. where in the ritual of sacrifice the victim’s tongue is mentioned as a special perquisite. The word figures prominently in magical documents. P Lond 1245} (iv/v A.p.) (=I. p. 122) βάλλε εἰς αὐτὸ γλῶσσαν βαθράκου shows whe frog’s tongue playing the same part as ‘‘ tongue of dog” in the witches’ spell in Macbeth: so also τό. 46°84 (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 74). There are niany curses which ‘*‘ hind” the tongue of their object : thus Syd/ $08 (Corcyra) Σιλανοῦ τὸν νόον kal τὰν γλῶσσαν τουτεῖ KaTaypadw—Silanus himself and three witnesses who enabled him to win a suit are cursed with this leaden tablet in mind and…
Read the full entry →γλῶσσα (glōssa) — tongue.
γλῶσσα,
Ionic dialect γλάσσα, [Refs 3rd c.BC+], Attic dialect γλῶττα, ης, ἡ, tongue, [Refs 8th c.BC+]
__b γ. λάρυγγος, ={γλωττίς}, larynx, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
2. tongue, as the organ of speech, γλώσσης χάριν through love of talking, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; γλώσσῃ δεινός, θρασύς, [Refs 5th c.BC+] by frankness of speech, [Refs 6th c.BC+], of fraud opposed to violence, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also, by word of mouth, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ γλώσσης ἄπο, i.e. our words, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀπὸ γ. φράσω by heart, opposed to γράμμασιν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐκ ἀπὸ γλώσσης not from mere word of mouth, but after full argument, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; μὴ διὰ γλώσσης without using the tongue, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —phrases: πᾶσαν γλῶτταν βασάνιζε try every art of tongue, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πᾶσαν ἱέναι γλῶσσαν let loose one's whole tongue, speak…
γλῶσσα
glossa
of uncertain affinity; the tongue; by implication, a language
(specially, one naturally unacquired):--tongue.
γλῶσσα, ης, ἡ
n.f.
the tongue, a language, nation
γλῶσσα glōssa 50x
the tongue, Mk. 7:33, 35, et al.; meton. speech, talk, 1 Jn. 3:18; a tongue, language, Acts 2:11; 1 Cor. 13:1, et al.; meton. a language not proper to a speaker, a gift or faculty of such language, Mk. 16:17; 1 Cor. 14:13, 14, 26, et al.; from Hebrew, a nation, as defined by its language, Rev. 5:9, et al.; lit. a tongue-shaped flail, Acts 2:3
γλῶσσα deriv. uncertain the tongue, Hom., etc.
the tongue, as the organ of speech, γλώσσης χάριν through love of talking, Hes., Aesch.; ἀπὸ γλώσσης by word of mouth, Hdt., Thuc.; οὐκ ἀπὸ γλώσσης not by word of mouth, not from mere hearsay, Aesch.; so, οὐ κατὰ γλῶσσαν Soph.; ἱέναι γλῶσσαν to let loose one's tongue, speak without restraint, id. Soph.; pl., κερτομίοις γλώσσαις, i.e. with blasphemies, id. Soph.:—for βοῦς ἐπὶ γλώσσηι, v. βοῦς.
a tongue, language, Hom., Hdt., etc.
the tongue or mouthpiece of a pipe, Aeschin.
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
tung: Almost invariably for either lashon, or glossa the latter word with the cognates heteroglossos, "of strange tongues" (1Co 14:21), glossodes, "talkative," English Versions of the Bible "full of tongue" (Sirach 8:3; 9:18), glossotomeo, "to cut out the tongue" (2 Macc 7:4), diglossos, "double-tongued" (Sirach 5:9; 28:13). In 1Ti 3:8, however, "double-tongued" is for dilogos, literally, "two-worded." Where "tongue" in the King James Version translates dialektos (Ac 1:19; 2:8; 21:40; 22:2; 26:14), the Revised Version (British and American) has "language," while for the King James Version "in the Hebrew tongue" in Joh 5:2; Re…
50 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 50 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 69 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἑπτὰ δὲ νοῦν καὶ γλῶσσαν ἐν ἑβδομάσιν μέγ’ ἄριστος ὀκτώ τ’, ἀμφοτέρων τέσσαρα καὶ δέκ’ ἔτη·
ταῦτα δʼ ἔλεγον πρὸς ἀλλήλους οὐχ ἡγούμενοι τὸν Ἰώσηπον γλώσσης τῆς αὐτῶν συνιέναι.
καὶ πάλιν λέγει: Ἠγάπησαν αὐτὸν τῷ στόματι αὐτῶν καὶ τῇ γλώσσῃ αὐτῶν ἐψεύσαντο αὐτόν, ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν οὐκ εὐθεῖα μετ̓ αὐτοῦ, οὐδὲ ἐπιστώθησαν ἐν τῇ διαθήκῃ αὐτοῦ.
Μενεμάχωι ὅτι οὐκ ἐγδείρας ἀποστέλλει πρὸς σὲ αὐτούς. τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ ὅσα κατὰ τὴν γλῶσσαν παρακαλεῖν ἐκέλευέν σε κ … εἶναι πρὸς τοῖς ἔργοις τοῖς παρὰ σοὶ εὐτονώτερον
rColumn 1 Θὼθ δ κδ ἔτους, κρέως μναῖ δ, ἄκρα β, γλῶσσα μία, ῥυγχίον α. ϛ, γλωσσοπωγώνιον. ια, κρέως μναῖ β, γλῶσσα μία, νεφρία β. ιβ,
θῆναι … … ου γλωσση … … διὰ20 στόματος … … ἐν καμίνῳ … … ἐγκώμια … ι
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
λαός (laos) refers to a people or crowd, often distinguished from rulers or leaders. It is used in various contexts, including the assembly of people, the common folk, and specifically the people of Israel in the New Testament, as seen in Matthew 27:25 and Luke 2:10. The term can also denote the Christian community as the people of God, contrasting with non-believers.
λαός, -ov, ὁ, [(cf. Curtius § 535)]; Sept. more than fifteen hundred times for Dy; rarely for ‘42 and px); [fr. Hom. down]; people; 1. a people, tribe, nation, all those who are of the same stock and language: univ. of any people; joined with γλῶσσα, φυλή, ἔθνος, Rev. v. 9; vii. 9; x.11; xi. 9; xiii. 7 [Ree. om.]; xiv. 6; xvii. 15, (see γλῶσσα, 2); πάντες of λαοί, Lk. ii. 31; Ro. xv. 11; esp. of the people of Israel: Mt. iv. 23; xiii. 15; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. ii. 10; Jn. xi. 50 (where it alternates with ἔθνος) ; xviii. 14; Acts iii. 23; Heb. ii. 17; vii. 11, ete.; with Ἰσραήλ added, Acts iv. 10; distinguished fr. τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, Acts xxvi. 17, 23; Ro. xv. 10; the plur. λαοὶ Ἰσραήλ [R. V. the peoples of Is.] seems to be used of the tribes of the people (like oD), Gen. xlix. 10; Deut. xxxii. 8; Is. iii. 13, ete.) in Acts iv. 27 (where the plur. was apparently occasioned by Ps. ii. 1 in its…
Read the full entry →λαός. In the papyri λαοί is the regular term for ‘‘ natives,” “‘fellaheen.” Thus in P Petr II. 4(11)* (B.c. 255-4) we hear of a salt-tax imposed τοῖς ἐκ Κερκεήσιος λαοῖς, where the editor remarks, ‘‘an ancient and poetical form for Jeople found both in the LXX and in Papyri’’: cf. P Lille I. 168 (iii/B.C.) ἐπειδὴ καὶ ἀπεργάζονται οἱ λαοὶ Td κέρμα τοῦτο εἰς ἄριστον, ‘since the natives are working off (?) this small tax as well as they can,” P Par 631% (B.c. 164) (=P Petr III. p. 26) τοὺς πλείστους δὲ τῶν ἐν ταῖς κώμαις κατοικούντῶν λαῶν οἵ διὰ τὴν τῶν δεόντων σπάνιν ἐργατεύοντες πορίἵονται τὰ πρὸς τὸ ζῆν, ‘also most of the people inhabiting the villages, who, through lack of necessaries, supply themselves with the means of life by hard labour’? (Mahaffy), z}. 15. τῶν μὲν ταλαιπώρων λαῶν καὶ τῶν μαχίμων Kal τῶν ἄλλων ἀδυνατούντων φείσεσθε, ‘you must spare the miserable populace and the…
Read the full entry →λαός (laos) — a people.
λᾱός, ὁ,
Ionic dialect ληός [Refs 6th c.BC+] (variant{λαόν}, which is in all Mss. in [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Attic dialect λεώς, which is also used in [Refs 5th c.BC+] and in late Prose, as Foed.Byzantine cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]
1. in [Refs 8th c.BC+] (λαοί) usually means men, i.e. soldiers, both of the whole army and smaller divisions, κριτὸς ἔγρετο λ. Ἀχαιῶν [Refs]; periphrastic, στρατὸς λαῶν[Refs]; mostly including both foot and horse, as [Refs]; but sometimes λαός denotes foot, as opposed to horse, [Refs]; also, a land army, opposed to a fleet, [Refs]; also, the common men, opposed to their leaders, [Refs]; but
2. in [Refs 8th c.BC+], almost always means men or people; as subjects of a prince, e.g. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; λαοὶ ἀγροιῶται country-folk, [Refs]; work-people, [Refs]; of sailors, [Refs…
λαός
laos
apparently a primary word; a people (in general; thus differing from
1218, which denotes one's own populace):--people.
see GREEK for 1218
λαός, οῦ, ὁ
n.m.
a people, the crowd
λαός λα_ός, οῦ, ionic ληός, attic λεώς: —, the people, both in sg. and pl., i. e.
in the warlike language of Il., the people or men of the army, soldiers; also a land-army, opp. to a fleet; the common men, opp. to their leaders
in the peaceful Od., men, people; so, ναυτικὸς λεώς seafaring folk, Aesch.; ὁ γεωργικὸς λεώς Ar.; ἀκούετε, λεῴ hear o people! the usual way of beginning proclamations at Athens, like our oyez! id. Ar.
in NTest. of Jews, and later of Christians, as opp. to heathens.
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
pe'-p'-l: In English Versions of the Bible represents something over a dozen Hebrew and Greek words. Of these, in the Old Testament, `am, is overwhelmingly the most common (about 2,000 times), with le'om, and goy, next in order; but the various Hebrew words are used with very little or no difference in force (e.g. Pr 14:28; but, on the other hand, in Ps 44 contrast verses 12 and 14). Of the changes introduced by the Revised Version (British and American) the only one of significance (cited explicitly in the Preface to the English Revised Version) is the frequent use of the plural "peoples" (strangely avoided in the King James Version except Re 10:11; 17:15), where other nations than Israel are in question. So, for instance, in Ps…
143 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 142 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 929 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„καὶ ἀπέστειλε κύριος εἰς τὸν λαὸν τοὺς ὄφεις τοὺς θανατοῦντας.
μετʼ οὐ πολὺν δὲ χρόνον μεταναστὰς καὶ ἀπὸ ταύτης τῆς χώρας σὺν τῷ σφετέρῳ λαῷ εἰς τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν λεγομένην νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν μετῴκησε καὶ οἱ ἀπʼ ἐκείνου πληθύσαντες, περὶ ὧν ἐν ἑτέρῳ λόγῳ διέξειμι τὰ ἱστορούμενα.
εἰς τοῦτο οὖν, ἀδελφοί, ὁ μακρόθυμος προβλέψας, ὡς ἐν ἀκεραιοσύνῃ πιστεύσει ὁ λαός, ὃν ἡτοίμασεν ἐν τῷ ἠγαπημένῳ αὐτοῦ, προεφανέρωσεν ἡμῖν περὶ πάντων, ἵνα μὴ προσρησσώμεθα ὡς ἐπήλυτοι τῷ ἐκείνων νόμῳ.
τοῦ Ἀρσινοείτου νομοῦ. ἐδάνεισεν Ἀπύγχις πρεσβύτερος Στοτοήτιος νεωτέρου ὡς ἐτῶν κ οὐλὴ ἀντικνήμιον ἀριστερὸν Λαου … ε … ευς Πέρσῃ τῆς ἐπιγονῆς ὡς ἐτῶν πεντήκοντα οὐλὴ πήχει δεξιῷ καὶ
Σισευ … … … Ἁρπήκου Σις … … Σανσνεῦς … … … Β … λαων Β … … … … … … πεντευ … … … … … ορ
παρὰ τοῦ … ειρ … φιλοσόφου … λάῳ ἐξα … … τας ἀρχ … κοντα η … ἄνελθε
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The Greek word ἔθνος (i.e., *ethnos*) refers to a multitude or a nation, often distinguished from the Jewish people. It can denote a company of individuals or animals and is frequently used in the New Testament to refer to Gentiles or non-Jews. The term appears in various contexts, including Acts and Matthew, where it highlights the distinction between Jews and other nations.
ἔθνος, -ους, τό; 1. a multitude (whether of men or of beasts) associated or living together ; a company, troop, swarm: ἔθνος ἑταίρων, ἔθνος ᾿Αχαιῶν, ἔθνος λαῶν, Hom. 1]. ; ἔθνος μελισσάων, 2,87; μυιάων ἔθνεα, ib. 469. 2. α multitude of individuals of the same nature or genus, (τὸ ἔθνος τὸ θῆλυ ἢ τὸ ἄρρεν, Xen. oec. 7, 26): πᾶν ἔθνος ἀνθρώπων, the human race, Acts xvii. 26 [but this seems to belong under the next head]. 3. race, nation: Mt. xxi. 43; Acts x. 35, ete.; ἔθνος ἐπὶ ἔθνος, Mt. xxiv. 7; ΜΚ. xiii. 8; οἱ ἄρχοντες, of βασιλεῖς τῶν ἐθνῶν, Mt. xx. 25; Lk. xxii. 25; used [in the sing.] of the Jewish people, Lk. vii. δ; xxiii. 2; Jn. xi. 48, 50-53; xviii. 35; Acts x. 22; xxiv. 2 (3), 10; xxvi. 4; xxviii. 19. 4. (ra) ἔθνη, like 0127 in the O. T., foreign nations not worshipping the true God, pagans, Gentiles, [ οἴ. Trench § xeviii.]: Mt. iv. 15 (Γαλιλαία τῶν ἐθνῶν), vi. 32; [3 Jn. 7…
Read the full entry →ἔθνος. Hicks in CR i. p. 42f. has shown that ‘‘ Hellenic life found its normal type in the πόλις, and barbarians who lived κατὰ κώμας or in some less organised form were ἔθνη,᾽᾿ and that similarly in the LXX and NT ἔθνος ‘‘ describes the pagan world, outside the Jewish Church,’’ but occasionally stands for the λαός itself, as in Ac 107%, 2477 α΄. In an Impenial rescript of a.p. 198-201 we have a good example of the word = ‘‘ province’ —P Oxy VII. 1020° ᾧ ἡγούplevos] τοῦ ἔθνους τὸν ἀγῶνα τῆς ἀφέσεως ἐκδικ[ήσει, “the praefect of the province shall decide the suit for release” (Ed.): cf. P Strass I. 2219 (iii/A.p.) διατάξεις εἰσὶν τῶν κυρίων περὶ τῶν ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν οἰκούντων, where the editor understands by ἔθνη, ‘“‘provinctae populé Romani,” and the exx. from Greek writers of this usage in Magie p. 59, dA7chzv i. p. 66: see also Deissmann Pax/, p. 100. In the edict regarding the aurum…
Read the full entry →ἔθνος (ethnos) — Gentiles.
ἔθνος, εος, τό:
(ϝέθνος,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: - number of people living together, company, body of men, ἑτάρων ἔ., ἔ. ἑταίρων, band of comrades, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔθνος λαῶν host of men, [Refs]; of particular tribes, Αυκίων μέγα ἔ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of animals, ἔ. μελισσάων, ὀρνίθων, μυιάων, swarms, flocks, etc., [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔ. ἀνέρων, γυναικῶν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔ. βρότεον, θνατόν, [Refs]; ἔ. τόδε, of the Erinyes, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
2. after [Refs 8th c.BC+], nation, people, τὸ Μηδικὸν ἔ. (γένος being a subdivision of ἔθνος) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔ. ἠπειρογενές, μαχαιροφόρον, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
ἔθνος
ethnos
probably from 1486; a race (as of the same habit), i.e. a tribe;
specially, a foreign (non-Jewish) one (usually, by implication,
pagan):--Gentile, heathen, nation, people.
see GREEK for 1486
ἔθνος, ους, τό
n.n.
a race, people, the Gentiles
ἔθνος ethnos 162x
a multitude, company, Acts 17:26; 1 Pet. 2:9; Rev. 21:24; a nation, people, Mt. 20:25; 21:43; pl. ἔθνη, from the Hebrew, nations or people as distinguished from the Jews, the heathen, Gentiles, Mt. 4:15; 10:5; Lk. 2:32
ἔθνος ἔθνος, εος, ἔθω a number of people accustomed to live together, a company, body of men, Il., etc.; ἔθνος λαῶν a host of men, id. Il.; also of animals, swarms, flocks, id. Il., Soph.
after Hom., a nation, people, Hdt., etc.:—in NTest. τὰ ἔθνη the nations, Gentiles, i. e. all but Jews and Christians.
a special class of men, a caste, tribe, Plat., Xen.
sex, id. Xen.
Noun-GSN — Noun · genitive · singular · neutergenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
N-GSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
164 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 162 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 509 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἐπειδὴ γὰρ πορεύεται ἡ ὑπομονητικὴ ψυχὴ Ῥεβέκκα πυθέσθαι παρὰ θεοῦ, ἀποκρίνεται αὐτῇ, ὅτι „δύο ἔθνη ἐν τῇ γαστρί σού ἐστι, καὶ δύο λαοὶ ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας σου διασταλήσονται, καὶ λαὸς λαοῦ ὑπερέξει, καὶ ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι“ (Gen.
ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.
λάβε πάλιν: Ἰδού, λέγει κύριος, πάντα τὰ ἔθνη ἀπερίτμητα ἀκροβυστίαν, ὁ δὲ λαὸς οὗτος ἀπερίτμητος καρδίας.
ὁ κύριος ἡμῶν … τοῦτο τὸ ἔθνος … λομενον πυ … εισθαι πρ … … ἐντολῆς … … εἰδῶσι ἔτους κϛ
ἀδελφῇ … χαίρειν. … μικρὸν παιδίον … ς φοινίκων … αν αὐτὸν ὡς … ἔθνη κoινὰν … μηχανῶν ἢ ἐρι… ἐπεὶ γὰρ χρείαν σου ἔχω … ἀσπάσασθαι. ἀπο
ἀπολαβεῖν σε τὴν νομὴν τῶν χωρὶς συνβάσεως κατεχομένων πρὸς βίαν χωρίων ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ ἔθνους κελεύσει … … θαλγη Ἀμβρήλου διὰ Ἀβδομάνχου υἱοῦ. ἀργύριον γυναῖκες δανίζεσθαι καὶ ὑπὲρ ἄλλων